Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI CLUBMAN.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering..................................................................................................................................20
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................24
On the road............................................................................................................................ 28
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 38
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................42
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 49
General settings................................................................................................................... 53
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................65
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................91
Transporting children safely..........................................................................................102
Driving..................................................................................................................................107
Displays................................................................................................................................ 132
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 151
Safety.....................................................................................................................................157
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................178
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 183
Climate control...................................................................................................................203
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Interior equipment............................................................................................................212
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................220
Cargo area............................................................................................................................224
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 232
Saving fuel...........................................................................................................................236
MOBILITY
Refueling..............................................................................................................................246
Fuel........................................................................................................................................248
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................250
Engine compartment........................................................................................................270
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................273
Coolant..................................................................................................................................277
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 279
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 281
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 291
Care........................................................................................................................................299
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 306
Appendix..............................................................................................................................309
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................310
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 VI/19, 07 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTES
Information ................................................................................................... 8
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-
vided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as a printed book from the service
center.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of informa-
tion
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.mini.jp.
Vehicle information and general informa-
tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
ditional information, refer to page 65.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can
be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
MINI Driver’s Guide Web
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
ble information for the selected vehicle. If
possible, only equipment and functions that
are actually installed in the vehicle will be
explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
played in any current browser.
Seite 8
NOTES Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be
followed in order to avoid the
possibility of injury to yourself
and to others as well as serious
damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with
the voice activation system..
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented
as a numbered list. The steps must be car-
ried out in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or
alternative possibilities are presented as a
list with bullet points.
– First possibility.
– Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's
Manual.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
tures and functions that are not available in
a vehicle, for example because of the se-
lected optional features or the country-spe-
cific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
For any options and equipment not descri-
bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have
about the features and options applicable to
your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con-
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
differ from those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Seite 9
Information NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-
sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,
BMW AG.
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
– Owner's Manual.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-
move stickers.
– Technical vehicle data.
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for
the operating conditions and registration
requirements applying in the country of
first delivery, also known as homologation.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-
ent country it might be necessary to adapt
your vehicle to potentially differing operat-
ing conditions and registration require-
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with
the homologation requirements in a certain
country you may not be able to lodge war-
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
information on warranty is available from a
service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, for instance the use
of modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires suitable maintenance
and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro-
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If
you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work,
e.g., maintenance and repair, according to
MINI specifications with properly trained
personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center
or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for in-
stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
thereby result in a safety risk.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available
from a MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by
the manufacturer of the MINI for their
safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
genuine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product
from another manufacturer can be used
with MINI vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for
MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
Seite 10
NOTES Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law re-
quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the
following warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
tomobile components and parts, including
components found in the interior furnish-
ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other re-
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo-
ratory animals. Always protect your skin
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa-
ter. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
haust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publica-
tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by
the following warranties:
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
– Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ranty.
– Federal Emissions Performance War-
ranty.
– California Emission Control System Lim-
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
dian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
and designed to meet the particular operat-
ing conditions and homologation require-
ments in your country and continental re-
gion in order to deliver the full driving
pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please con-
tact Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
the road safety, operational reliability and
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Seite 11
Information NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Specifications for required maintenance
measures:
– MINI Maintenance system.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models.
– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in
damaging the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in
the vehicle. Electronic control units process
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-
generate or exchange with each other. Some
control units are necessary for the vehicle
to function safely or provide assistance dur-
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control units facili-
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data
can be requested from the manufacturer of
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-
ple.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-
cle identification number. Depending on the
country, the vehicle owner can be identified
with the vehicle identification number, li-
cense plate and corresponding authorities.
In addition, there are other options to track
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized
services.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the ve-
hicle.
For example, this includes:
– Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel rota-
tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration, engaged safety
belt indicator.
– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
and ignition keys, contain components for
storing technical information. Information
about the vehicle condition, component us-
age, maintenance requirements events or
faults can be stored temporarily or perma-
nently.
This information generally records the state
of a component, a module, a system, or the
environment, for instance:
– Operating states of system components,
for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
pressure, battery status.
– Malfunctions and faults in important
system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
uations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability con-
trol systems.
– Information on vehicle-damaging
events.
The data is required to perform the control
unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions.
Seite 12
NOTES Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The majority of this data is volatile and is
only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small share of data is stored in event
or fault memories based on an event.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and qual-
ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
gether with the vehicle identification
number.
A dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The socket for OBD On-
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-
hicle is used to read out the data.
The data is collected, processed, and used
by the relevant organizations in the service
network. The data documents technical con-
ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-
fication of the fault, compliance with war-
ranty obligations and quality improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with prod-
uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the
vehicle manufacturer needs technical data
from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle
can also be used to check customer claims
for warranty and guaranty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can
be reset when a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com-
fort and individual settings can be stored in
the vehicle and modified or reset at any
time.
For example, this includes:
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
– Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the
entertainment and communication system
of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on
the respective equipment:
– Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated
multimedia system.
– Address book data for use in conjunc-
tion with an integrated hands-free sys-
tem or an integrated navigation system.
– Entered navigation destinations.
– Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
or is found on a device that has been con-
nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
upon personal request as part of the use of
online services. The transmission depends
on the selected settings for the use of the
services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
stance smartphones, can be controlled via
the vehicle control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile de-
vice can be played back and displayed
through the multimedia system. Certain in-
formation is transferred to the mobile de-
vice at the same time. Depending on the
type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
stance position data and other general vehi-
cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
or music playback, work.
Seite 13
Information NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-
tive access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is
determined by the provider of the particular
app being used. The extent of the possible
settings depends on the respective app and
the operating system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
nection, this enables data to be exchanged
between the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit
or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online
functions' to be used. These include online
services and apps supplied by the vehicle
manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle
manufacturer are concerned, the corre-
sponding functions are described in the ap-
propriate place, for instance the Owner's
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-
vant legal information pertaining to data
protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online serv-
ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of
the vehicle manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of per-
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
provide the services must always be based
on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-
vate or deactivate the data connection as a
whole. That is, with the exception of func-
tions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other pro-
viders, these services are the responsibility
of the relevant provider and subject to their
data privacy conditions and terms of use.
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence
on the content exchanged during this proc-
ess. Information on the way in which per-
sonal data is collected and used in relation
to services from third parties, the scope of
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained
from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
– How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
– Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were fastened.
– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
– How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
Seite 14
NOTES Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the ve-
hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be
found in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also
be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
Seite 15
Information NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Seite 16
NOTES Information
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Seite 17
Information NOTES
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ...................................................................................................... 20
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 24
On the road ................................................................................................. 28
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Entering
Opening and closing
Buttons on the vehicle key
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3
Open split doors
4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, either only the
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button on the vehicle key again to un-
lock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
hicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Locking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Opening the split doors with no-touch
activation
Concept
The split doors can be opened with no-touch
activation using the vehicle key you are car-
rying.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle
at approx. one arm's length away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-
rection of travel and immediately pull it
back.
Split Doors
Opening
– Unlock the vehicle and use the button in
the handle to completely open first the
right side, arrow 1, and then the left side
of the split doors, arrow 2.
– Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second
to open the right side of the split
doors.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key again for approx. 1 second to open
the left side of the split doors.
Depending on the setting, the doors may be
unlocked.
Closing
Closing the split doors manually.
Seite 21
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
nal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Driver's door
1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors
All around the selector lever
1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake
Central Information Display (CID)
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu
for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Help on the voice activation system
– To have information on the operating
principle of the voice activation system
read out loud: ›General information on
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read
out loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the in-
terior mirror.
Seite 23
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Adjusting the steering wheel
In four directions
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory
function:
– Seat position.
– Exterior mirror position.
– Height of the Head-up Display.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the
seat while the LED is illuminated. The
LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automati-
cally.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a seat adjust-
ment switch or one of the memory buttons
is pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-
sition on the driver's side is disabled after a
short while.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Changing the waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Changing the station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Select the country from the list.
Seite 25
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/
city
1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with
each entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/
city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destina-
tion guidance is started to the town/city
center.
Pairing the mobile phone
After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-
ated using the Central Information Display
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-
ken instructions.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-
played on the Control Display.
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used.
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
bile phone, refer to the mobile phone
owner's manual: e.g., search for or con-
nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-
vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap-
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID) or the button
on the steering wheel.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Dialing a number
1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the numbers individually.
4. Select the symbol.
Establish the connection via the additional
phone:
1. Press the button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-
tion are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Seite 27
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
On the road
Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Ignition on/off
– On: press the Start/Stop
button.
Most of the indicator/
warning lights light up for
a varied length of time.
– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out.
– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is
switched off, press the ON/OFF button
on the radio or when the engine is run-
ning, press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power con-
sumers remain ready for operation.
Start/stop engine
Steptronic transmission: starting
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission: switching off
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply
the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: switching off
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Steptronic transmission: switches the en-
gine off automatically while stationary to
save fuel. The engine starts automatically
when the brake pedal is released.
Manual transmission: switches the engine
off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-
pressed, the engine starts automatically.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
Manual transmission: press the switch
while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: press the switch
while the brake is pressed or selector lever
position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Manual transmission
Shifting
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right in order to
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or
4th gear.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en-
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting
movement.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
Parking position P.
R is reverse.
Neutral N.
Drive mode D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only
when the vehicle is stationary.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.
Selector lever lock
A lock prevents an inadvertent change from
selector lever position P to another selector
lever position and, depending on the trans-
mission version, inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-
pressed, press the button on the front or
side of the selector lever.
Steptronic transmission, Sport and
manual mode
Sport program:
Press the selector lever to the left from se-
lector lever position D.
Manual mode:
– To shift down: press the selector lever
forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
High beams, headlight flasher, turn
signal, roadside parking light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Seite 29
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Turn signal
– On: press the lever past the resistance
point.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-
ance point.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down.
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.
– On: with the ignition switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the re-
sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Rain sensor: position 1.
– Normal wiper speed: position 2.
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
Seite 31
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Recirculated-air mode.
Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Button Function
Controls the air flow,
manual.
Controls the air distribution
manually.
Windshield defroster.
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC/recirculated-
air mode.
Controls the air flow,
manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Button Function
Defrosts and defogs the
windows.
Windshield defroster.
Rear window defroster.
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap
opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without
metallic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade
can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Seite 33
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month.
– Before embarking on an extended trip.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a
shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the
vehicle before engine oil is added.
Adding
Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the
message.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
Seite 34
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Seite 35
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 38
Central Information Display (CID) ...................................................... 42
Voice activation system ......................................................................... 49
General settings ....................................................................................... 53
Owner's Manual media ........................................................................... 65
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 87
2 Exterior mirror operation 99
3 Buttons of the central locking sys-
tem 75
4 Lights
Front fog lights 154
Light switch 151
Lights off
Daytime running lights 153
Parking lights 151
Low beams 151
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Automatic headlight con-
trol 152
Cornering light 153
High-beam Assistant 153
Instrument lighting 155
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Camera-based cruise control
on/off 183
Cruise control on/off 190
Cruise control: to store the
speed
Pausing, continuing cruise
control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control:
reduce distance
Camera-based cruise control:
increase distance
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 114
High beams, head-
light flasher 114
High-beam Assistant 153
Roadside parking lights 152
Onboard Computer 142
7 Instrument cluster 132
8 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 115
Wiper on Canadian mod-
els 119
Rain sensor 116
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 120
Cleaning windows 117
Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 117
Rear window wiper 117
Clean the rear window 117
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 49
Telephone
Confirm the selection 142
Move selection up 142
Move selection down 142
Seite 39
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
11 Adjusting the steering wheel 101
12 Unlocking the hood 271
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 291
Intelligent Safety 168
2 Control Display 42
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 220
5 Climate control 203
6 PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 192
Rearview camera 195
Parking assistant 198
Auto Start/Stop func-
tion 110
Start/stop the engine and
switch the ignition on/
off 107
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
178
MINI Driving Modes
switch 180
7 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 124
Manual transmission selector
lever 123
8 Controller with buttons 44
9 Parking brake 113
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request,
SOS 292
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-
senger airbag 160
3 Reading lights 155
4 Ambient light 155
5 Panoramic glass sunroof 89
6 Interior lights 155
Seite 41
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be-
tween entering upper and lower case let-
ters, numbers and characters:
Symbol Function
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally.
Entries are continuously compared with
data stored in the vehicle.
– Only those letters are offered during en-
try for which data is available.
– Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are availa-
ble on the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a
checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper
area of the Control Display. Status informa-
tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular net-
work.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not ac-
tive.
Request for the current vehicle
position.
Checking the current vehicle po-
sition.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the Onboard Com-
puter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 43
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus which
support the split screen function.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of dis-
plays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 302.
In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in-
stance through shade or air conditioning,
the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place objects in the area
in front of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automat-
ically after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press the button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Operation
– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
– Press to select a menu item, for example.
– Tilt in four directions to switch between
displays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Button Function
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu
for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Seite 45
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears.
– Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previ-
ous display is shown.
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
– Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press the button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas:
– Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
– Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
– If applicable, further operating options
for the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete
letters or number.
or
Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which there is an entry
are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries
are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
try.
The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Operation via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a
touchscreen.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap the desired menu item.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
– Swipe to the left.
– Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on the symbol.
2. Tap on the symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed
via the touchscreen.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. To perform the desired setting:
– Slide in the selected field to the right
or left, until the desired setting is
displayed.
– , Tap on the symbol.
Seite 47
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard appears in the Control Dis-
play.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the
letter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol
all letters: deletes all letters or
numbers.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the
fingers.
Programmable memory but-
tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the
top edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice commands
via the voice activation system. The system
supports you with announcements during
input.
General information
– Functions that can only be used when
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-
bal instructions to use with the voice ac-
tivation system.
Functional requirements
– A language must be set via the Control
Display that is supported by the voice
activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 53.
– Always say commands in the language
of the voice activation system.
Using the voice activation sys-
tem
Activating the voice activation
system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
No other commands may be available. In
this case, operate the function via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
Seite 49
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
You can also select list entries such as
phone list entries via voice activation. Read
these list entries out loud exactly as they
are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of
the Control Display:
– Some possible commands for the current
menu.
– Some possible commands from other
menus.
– Status of the voice recognition.
– Encrypted connection is not availa-
ble.
Help on the voice activation system
– To have information on the operating
principle of the voice activation system
read out loud: ›General information on
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read
out loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone set-
tings
The commands of the menu items are spo-
ken just as they are selected via the Con-
troller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
put, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation
and system announcements can be set.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dia-
log or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of
the voice activation system. The function
can be deactivated if inquiries are often un-
desirably interrupted, for instance due to
background noise or talking.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Activating voice recognition via
the server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while im-
proving the quality of voice recognition. To
use the functions, data is transmitted to a
service provider via an encrypted connec-
tion and stored locally there.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken
instructions until the desired volume is set.
– The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 292, close to the interior mirror.
System limits
– Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors, win-
dows, and glass sunroof closed.
– Noises from the front passenger or the
rear seat bench can impair the system.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
– Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the voice recognition feature.
Speak loud and clear.
Using the voice activation sys-
tem of the smartphone
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can
be used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the
smartphone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on
the smartphone.
2. Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirma-
tion appears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice com-
mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
appears on the Control Display.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Concept
Alexa is a digital assistant by Amazon. With
Amazon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can be
used in the vehicle.
Seite 51
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
General information
Some of the Alexa functions are limited in
the vehicle to prevent any impairment of
safety while driving.
Functional requirement
– Amazon Alexa Car Integration pur-
chased via MINI Connected Store.
– The ConnectedDrive account in the ve-
hicle is the same as in the MINI Con-
nected app.
– The vehicle is connected in the MINI
Connected app.
– Amazon account and MINI account are
connected in the MINI Connected app.
– Bluetooth connection or USB connection
between vehicle and mobile device is
active.
Activation in the MINI Connected
app
The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti-
vated in the MINI Connected app.
Follow the instructions in the app.
Activation in the vehicle
An authorization for the use of Amazon
Alexa Car Integration is required every time
before starting a trip.
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion:
– Pair mobile device with the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
– Select driver profile, refer to
page 81.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. Wait for the signal.
4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired
command.
Information about the active function is
displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the ve-
hicle and start the engine again.
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the voice dialog
For voice dialog for the voice activation sys-
tem, refer to page 50.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Seite 53
General settings AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Date
Setting the date
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and
year.
Setting the date format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the units of measure-
ment
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, consumption, dis-
tances and temperature.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis-
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti-
vated or deactivated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE General settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Control Display
Brightness
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be
displayed after an adjustable time.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
– Communication messages, for example
e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
ers.
– Check Control messages.
– Service requirements messages.
– Messages from the vehicle manufac-
turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
Retrieving messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages or messages from the vehicle manu-
facturer, can be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from
the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as
long as they are relevant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 55
General settings AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3. Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
– Select the applications, from which mes-
sages will be permitted.
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers various functions which
require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
deactivated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
tive function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-
tion.
– Music hard disk.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
– Phone book.
– Office data, for instance voice notes.
– Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
trol Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to
complete.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-
tion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the
data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The
connection type to select depends on the
mobile device and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
for them. The scope of functions depends on
the mobile device.
Function Connec-
tion type
Making calls via the hands-
free system.
Using phone functions via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the
smartphone or the audio
player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Using compatible apps via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Bluetooth
or USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing
driver profiles.
Performing software up-
dates.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the
smartphone or the USB stor-
age device.
USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps
via the Central Information
Display (CID) and voice op-
eration.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
– Bluetooth.
– Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Seite 57
General settings AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Compatible devices
General information
Malfunctions may occur with devices not
listed or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number.
These numbers can be displayed in the ve-
hicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 63, can
be performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
– Compatible device, refer to page 58,
with Bluetooth interface.
– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
– The device is ready for operation.
– Bluetooth is activated on the device and
in the vehicle, refer to page 58.
– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti-
vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmit-
ting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
Activate function to show the con-
tact pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the de-
vice will be used:
– "Telephone"
– "Bluetooth® audio"
– "Apps"
– "Apple CarPlay"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-
played on the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-
tooth devices in the vicinity.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-
cle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
If connection was not successful: Fre-
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 59.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
– There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
cle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
– The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery
life.
Charge the mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
act?
– The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on
again.
– Possibly too high or too low ambient
temperatures for mobile phone opera-
tion.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
the Central Information Display (CID)?
– The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
dio device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries
displayed or why are they incomplete?
Seite 59
General settings AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Transmission of the phone book entries
is not yet complete.
– It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM
card are transmitted.
– It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
– It may not be possible to transmit con-
tacts from social networks.
– The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
– Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such
as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an
audio source.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-
nect it with the telephone or additional
phone function.
How can the phone connection quality be
improved?
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
pending on the mobile phone.
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
less charging tray.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
and loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked
and the required function is still not availa-
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are con-
nected to the USB interface.
– Mobile phones.
– Audio devices with USB port, for in-
stance MP3 players.
– USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charge current via the USB
interface if the device supports this. Follow
the maximum charge current of the USB in-
terface.
Vehicles: the following uses are possible on
USB interfaces with data transfer:
– Exporting and importing driver profiles,
refer to page 81.
– Playing music files via USB audio.
– Playing videos via USB video.
– Loading of software updates, refer to
page 63.
Follow the following when connecting:
– Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
– Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
– Due to the large number of USB storage
devices available on the market, it can-
not be guaranteed that every device is
operable on the vehicle.
– Do not expose USB storage devices to
extreme environmental conditions, such
as very high temperatures; refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
– Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the me-
dia stored on the USB storage device
cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
– To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it
is connected to the USB interface.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE General settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Depending on how the USB storage de-
vice is being used, settings may be re-
quired on the USB storage device, refer
to the owner's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs.
– USB memory card readers with multiple
slots.
– HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
– Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 58, with
USB interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a
suitable adapter cable to a USB interface,
refer to page 218.
The USB storage device is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 58.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-
tion are switched on on the iPhone.
– Booking the MINI Connected service:
Apple CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 59, via Bluetooth
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to
page 62.
Operation
For more information, refer to the
Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
lected.
– Delete the iPhone concerned from the
device list.
Seite 61
General settings AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored vehicles
under Bluetooth and under WiFi.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available:
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
– After one-time pairing, the devices are
automatically recognized and recon-
nected when the ignition is switched on.
– The data stored on the SIM card or in
the mobile phone is transferred to the
vehicle after recognition.
– For some devices, certain settings may
be necessary, for instance authorization,
see owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with
the vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated
for paired and connected devices.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
function will be deactivated where appro-
priate for a device that is already connected
and the device will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The device's connection to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con-
nected again, refer to page 62.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. The func-
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE General settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
tions may be deactivated on a device al-
ready connected.
Deleting the device
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-
ditional phone can be switched.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mo-
bile devices, for example mobile phones and
MP3 players. Software updates are available
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle
software updates.
Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
information on available software updates.
Displaying the version of the installed
software
The software version installed in the vehicle
is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, se-
lect the desired version to display additional
information.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB
interface.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
You can restore the software to the version
prior to the last update or to its factory set-
tings.
The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 63
General settings AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
– "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE General settings
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
You can use the following media formats to
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 65.
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 65.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as a printed book from the service
center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
Manuals, which are included in addition to
the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press the button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's
Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
ous contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating
to the function that is currently selected
can be displayed directly.
Seite 65
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Opening via Central Information
Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to
the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the
page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called
up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via the
Central Information Display (CID):
– "Quick reference"
– "Search by pictures"
– "Keyword search"
– "Animations"
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed
immediately.
Seite 66
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Seite 67
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................ 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ..................................................... 91
Transporting children safely .............................................................. 102
Driving ...................................................................................................... 107
Displays .................................................................................................... 132
Lights ........................................................................................................ 151
Safety ......................................................................................................... 157
Driving stability control systems ..................................................... 178
Driving comfort ...................................................................................... 183
Climate control ....................................................................................... 203
Interior equipment ................................................................................ 212
Storage compartments ......................................................................... 220
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 224
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle
keys with integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery, refer to page 73.
Depending on the equipment and country
version, various settings, refer to page 83,
can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile, refer to page 81,
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
To provide information on maintenance re-
quirements, the service data is stored in the
vehicle key, refer to page 279.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-
iting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock them-
selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
that the vehicle can be opened from the
outside.
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 70
CONTROLS Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3
Open split doors
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 83, the following access points are
unlocked.
– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button on the vehicle key
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
– All doors, the split doors, and fuel filler
flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-
nals and the horn. This function must be
activated in the settings, refer to
page 83.
– The settings stored in the driver profile,
refer to page 81, are applied.
– The driver's seat is set to the last posi-
tion saved in the driver's profile. This
function must be activated in the set-
tings, refer to page 83.
– The interior lights, refer to page 155,
and the MINI logo projection are
switched on, provided that the interior
lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and headlight courtesy delay fea-
ture, refer to page 152, are switched on.
– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-
ient closing are folded open.
– The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle
key.
The following functions are executed:
– All doors, the split doors, and the fuel
filler flap are locked.
– Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be ac-
tivated in the settings, refer to
page 83.
– The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-
nition must be switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
Seite 71
Opening and closing CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key in the area close to the ve-
hicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Switch on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched
on.
These functions are not available if the inte-
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-
ing the button again.
Split Doors
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the split doors can be opened with
the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 83.
When the trailer socket is in use, the split
doors cannot be opened with the vehicle
key or with the button in the car's interior.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the split doors. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
The split doors swivel back and to the side
when they open. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the split doors is clear during
opening and closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
1. Press the button on the vehicle
key for approx. 1 second.
The right side of the split doors opens.
2. Press the button on the vehicle
key again for approx. 1 second.
Seite 72
CONTROLS Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The left side of the split doors opens.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-
hicle key, refer to page 75.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
the battery compartment and raise the
cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-
row using a pointed object and lift it
out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the
positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from a
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
Seite 73
Opening and closing CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 73.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with electronic devices.
– Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for
instance charging of a mobile phone.
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-
tion.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can
be unlocked and locked from the outside
with the integrated key, refer to page 74.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the Vehicle key
It is not possible to start the engine if the
vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
on the steering column as shown. Pay
attention to the display in the instru-
ment cluster.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
change the position of the vehicle key and
repeat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
in vehicle key?
– The options provided by the Remote
Services of the MINI Connected app in-
clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
hicle.
This requires an active MINI Connected
contract and the MINI Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Safety information
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Seite 74
CONTROLS Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Remove the
integrated key before pulling the outside
door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
Buttons for the central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard
warning system and interior lights come on.
Seite 75
Opening and closing CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front
doors closed.
– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
– The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
– Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors
remain locked.
– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-
dle on the door to be opened; the first
time unlocks the door, the second time
opens it. The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
– Convenient closing.
– Opening split doors.
– Open split doors with no-touch activa-
tion.
This function is not available in vehicles
with a trailer hitch.
Functional requirements
– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Seite 76
CONTROLS Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 83, only the driver's door and the
fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike
when unlocking with the vehicle key, press-
ing the button on the outer door handle
again does not unlock the other vehicle ac-
cess points. Rather, the vehicle is locked
again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central
locking system from the inside, note the fol-
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
opened from the inside with the door
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han-
dle must be pressed again.
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driv-
er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and
glass sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Open split doors
General information
If the split doors are opened via Comfort Ac-
cess, locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
Seite 77
Opening and closing CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the split doors. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
The split doors swivel back and to the side
when they open. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the split doors is clear during
opening and closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
First press button in right-hand handle, ar-
row 1, then press button in left-hand han-
dle, arrow 2.
Opening the split doors with no-
touch activation
Concept
The split doors can be opened with no-touch
activation using the vehicle key you are car-
rying. Two sensors detect a forward-di-
rected foot motion in the center of the area
at the rear of the vehicle and the split doors
open.
This function is not available in vehicles
with trailer hitch.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the
split doors may open or close inadvertently
if you unintentionally move your foot or if a
foot movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the
vehicle.
If the split doors are opened with no-touch
activation, locked doors are not unlocked.
Contactless opening of the split doors must
be activated in the settings.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, such as the hot exhaust
gas system. There is a risk of injury. When
moving your foot, make sure you have a
firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.
Seite 78
CONTROLS Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the split doors. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
The split doors swivel back and to the side
when they open. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the split doors is clear during
opening and closing.
Adjusting
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting:
"Open by foot movement"
Contactless opening of the split doors is
switched on or off.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle
at approx. one arm's length away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-
rection of travel and immediately pull it
back. With this movement, the leg must
pass through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
1. Perform the foot movement described
earlier.
The right side of the split doors opens.
2. After complete opening of the right side,
make a second foot movement in order
to open the left side of the split doors.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-
tem flashes.
Malfunction
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 73.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key.
Seite 79
Opening and closing CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
locking request recognition function on the
door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-
hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to
page 74.
Split Doors
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the split doors can be opened with
the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 83.
When the trailer socket is in use, the split
doors cannot be opened with the vehicle
key or with the button in the car's interior.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the split doors. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
The split doors swivel back and to the side
when they open. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the split doors is clear during
opening and closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening from the outside
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-
cle or have the vehicle key with you.
Use the button in the handle to com-
pletely open first the right side, arrow 1,
and then the left side of the split doors,
arrow 2.
– Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve-
hicle key, refer to page 72.
The right side of the split doors opens.
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key again for approx.
1 second.
Seite 80
CONTROLS Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The left side of the split doors opens.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
tion P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area twice in
quick succession.
The right split door opens. Press button
again to open the left split door as well.
Closing
To close the split doors, first close the left
side, then the right side.
Driver profiles
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which
personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
ery vehicle key has been assigned one of
these driver profiles.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle
key, the assigned personal driver profile will
be activated. All settings stored in the
driver profile are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own vehicle
keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-
tings as it is being unlocked. These settings
are also restored, if the vehicle has been
used in the meantime by a person with a
different vehicle key.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently acti-
vated.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set-
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to
the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver pro-
files.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the
driver profile associated to a particular
driver, the detected vehicle key must be
clearly allocated to the driver.
This is the case when:
– The driver is only carrying his or her
own vehicle key.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle.
– The driver gets into the vehicle through
the driver's door.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
– Unlocking and locking.
– Lights.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster.
– Programmable memory buttons.
– Volumes, tone.
– Control Display.
– Climate control.
Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Navigation.
– PDC Park Distance Control.
– Rearview camera.
– Head-up Display.
– MINI Driving Modes.
– Intelligent Safety.
– Driver's seat position, exterior mirror
position.
Both the positions saved via the seat
memory and the last position set are
saved.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
ferent driver profile may be activated. This
allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
with your own remote control.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
– All settings stored in the selected driver
profile are automatically applied.
– The called-up driver profile is assigned
to the vehicle key being used at the
time.
– If the driver profile is already assigned
to a different vehicle key, this driver
profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings
that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
assigned to the vehicle key that is not used
at the time.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the ac-
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-
tween the driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently
in use are reset to their factory settings.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
Seite 82
CONTROLS Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
trieving personal settings, for instance be-
fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be taken into
another vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can
be imported via the USB interface.
The existing settings of the active driver
profile are overwritten with the settings of
the imported driver profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed at each
startup to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the vehicle key
and driver may not be possible in the fol-
lowing cases, for example.
– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
his or her own vehicle key, but another
person is driving.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
fort Access and has multiple vehicle
keys with him or her.
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is
not locked and unlocked.
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-
side of the vehicle.
Adjusting
General information
Depending on the package and country ver-
sion, various settings are available for the
vehicle key functions.
These settings are stored for the driver pro-
file, refer to page 81, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing
again unlocks the entire vehicle.
– "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Seite 83
Opening and closing CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Split doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates
the current setting.
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Split Rear Doors"
Only the split doors are opened.
– "Split Rear Doors and door(s)"
The split doors are opened and the
doors unlocked.
– "Split doors open only when the
vehicle has first been unlocked"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the split doors can be used with the
vehicle key.
– "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the split
doors via the vehicle key.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
fered.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the
driver profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's
seat and exterior mirrors resume their last
set positions.
The most recent position is independent of
the positions saved via the seat memory.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:
– "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after
a while if no door is opened after un-
locking.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically un-
locked.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Seite 84
CONTROLS Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
alarm system reacts to the following
changes:
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the
hood or the split doors.
– Movements in the car's interior.
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
– Disconnected battery voltage.
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis.
– Locking the vehicle while a device is
connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 280.
The alarm system signals these changes vis-
ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
– Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Overview
Indicator light in the roof fin.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei-
ther with the vehicle key or via Comfort Ac-
cess, the alarm system is switched off and
on at the same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using
the integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 86.
Opening the split doors with the
alarm system switched on
The split doors can be opened even when
the alarm system is switched on.
After the split doors are closed, they are
locked and monitored again when the doors
Seite 85
Opening and closing CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
are locked. The hazard warning system
flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator lights
– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
split doors are not correctly closed. Cor-
rectly closed access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
– The indicator light goes out after un-
locking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
– The indicator light flashes after unlock-
ing until the engine ignition is switched
on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-
nutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
authorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– In duplex garages.
– During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer.
– With animals in the vehicle.
– When the vehicle is locked after start of
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
Switching off the alarm
– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
remote control or switch on the ignition
using the emergency detection of re-
mote control, refer to page 73.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the
vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle
Seite 86
CONTROLS Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
using the button on the driver's side or
passenger side door.
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the windows are automatically closed ex-
cept a gap.
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
Overview
Power windows.
Safety switch.
Opening
– Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is
being held.
– Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening with the vehicle key,
refer to page 71.
Closing
– Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
being held.
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again
stops the motion.
Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-
fer to page 72.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to
page 77.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
a window is being closed, the closing action
is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Seite 87
Opening and closing CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as an-
tennas can impact jam protection. There is
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
in the area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro-
tection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds
and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec-
tion.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch can be used to prevent
children, for instance from opening and
closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the safety function is switched off automati-
cally.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be
operated to a limited extent.
– After a power failure during the opening
or closing process, the a window can
only be operated to a limited extent. The
system must be initialized in this case.
– The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times
within a short period of time, the over-
heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
gree of overheating, it may only be pos-
sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window
motor to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the engine is run-
ning.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
1. Open the affected window completely.
2. Pull the switch to the resistance
point and hold.
Seite 88
CONTROLS Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The window closes.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled
to the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or
twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass
sunroof is automatically closed.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the glass sunroof is clear during opening
and closing.
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point
and release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and re-
lease it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
– Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is
opened as long as the
switch is pressed.
– Press the switch back beyond the resist-
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Seite 89
Opening and closing CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
– Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed
as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
raised position.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
the raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward be-
yond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
roof is closing.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
ance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited
jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power
interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 90
CONTROLS Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the
needs of the occupants can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat-
ing position plays an important role. Follow
the information in the following chapters:
– Seats, refer to page 91.
– Safety belts, refer to page 94.
– Head restraints, refer to page 96.
– Airbags, refer to page 157.
Front seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to
unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-
cle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv-
er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
ing under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do
not adjust again while driving.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 91
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly making sure it en-
gages properly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-
crease the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is
stored for the profile currently used. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
function, refer to page 84, is activated for
this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored us-
ing the memory function, refer to page 98.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
Seite 92
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
– Press the front/rear sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is in-
creased/decreased.
– Press the upper/lower sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted
up/down.
Seite 93
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-
just the thigh support.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem-
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx.
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-
vated automatically with the temperature
selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 237, the heating output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety
belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear
seat is intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are be-
ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
Although airbags enhance safety by provid-
ing added protection, they are not a substi-
tute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of
every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the abil-
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
and children are not allowed on an occu-
pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
Seite 94
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
cured in designated child restraint sys-
tems.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts cor-
rectly.
Warning
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the
protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. If you are using
the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
seat backrest.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or
fail in the following situations:
– The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
any other way.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
in the event of an accident. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and
keep them clean. Have the safety belts
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight
to your body over your lap and should-
ers.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
– Avoid thick clothing.
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over
shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
up mechanism.
Seite 95
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
senger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing: John Cooper Works
sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Seite 96
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Seite 97
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Fold down
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, ar-
row 2.
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward
the front as far as it will go. Make sure
that the head restraint engages cor-
rectly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer
to page 227, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory
function:
– Seat position.
– Exterior mirror position.
– Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Different settings can be assigned to two
memory locations.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored.
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
Warning
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem-
ory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Seite 98
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automati-
cally.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a seat adjust-
ment switch or one of the memory buttons
is pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-
sition on the driver's side is disabled after a
short while.
Call up deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
– Open or close the door or split doors.
– Press a button on the vehicle key.
– Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 84, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traf-
fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
for instance while changing lanes. There is
a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to
the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Overview
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 99
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-
cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Be-
fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand
or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in
the following situations:
– In vehicle washes.
– On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out
automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically
heated as needed and when the ignition is
switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 101, are
used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass
on the front passenger side is tilted down-
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other formatting issue - low-lying ob-
stacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
ror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Seite 100
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect
by the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
– In the mirror glass.
– On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 101
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems
designed for the age, weight and size of the
child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due
to their age, weight, or size.
Safety information
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm without suitable additional child
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety
gear, including safety belts, can be limited
or lost when safety belts are fastened in-
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for in-
stance in the event of an accident or dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se-
cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm us-
ing suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-
Seite 102
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
activation of front-seat passenger airbags,
refer to page 159.
Safety information
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint sys-
tems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
be properly restrained in the event of an
accident or braking and evasive maneu-
vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten-
ing system has been damaged or exposed
to an accident, have these systems
checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Seite 103
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Before installing a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 159.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
and thus best possible position for the belt
and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child
seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passen-
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with
the safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and
pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in-
formation from the child restraint system
manufacturer when installing and using
LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Seite 104
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg
when the child is restrained by the internal
harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint
fixing system can be limited. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the lower anchors are securely en-
gaged and that the LATCH child restraint
fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
anchors are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with
a middle seat:
It is not recommended to
use the inner lower anchors
of standard outer LATCH
positions to fasten a child
restraint system on the
middle seat. Use the vehicle
safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
properly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect can be reduced. There is
a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper
retaining strap does not run over sharp
edges and is not twisted as it passes the
upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
tective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In certain situa-
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or
in case of an accident, the rear backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear
backrests are locked.
Seite 105
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps
of child restraint systems are only pro-
vided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors
can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Only mount child restraint
systems to the upper anchors.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an-
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window
shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of
the supports of the head restraint to the
anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Locking the doors and win-
dows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's
door if children are being trans-
ported in the rear.
This locks various functions so that they
cannot be operated from the rear: safety
switch, refer to page 88.
Seite 106
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the
engine starts in selector lever
position P or N with the brake pedal pressed
when you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/
Stop button is pressed.
Ignition on
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop
button without stepping on the clutch
pedal.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, but do not press on the brake
pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the clutch
pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector
lever position P, press the Start/Stop button
again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster
go out.
To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
The ignition is switched off automatically in
the following situations while the vehicle is
stationary and the engine is off:
– When locking the vehicle, even if the
low beams are switched on.
– Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still
be started. This function is only availa-
ble when the low beams are switched
off.
– When opening or closing the driver
door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
buckled and the low beams are switched
off.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
led with driver's door open and low
beams off.
– When the front doors are opened if
there is no other person sitting in the
front seats.
Seite 107
Driving CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– The low beams switch to parking lights
after some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated
selector lever, refer to page 124: when
switching off the ignition, the selector lever
position P is engaged automatically if the
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con-
sumers remain ready for operation.
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/
Stop button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition
is switched on: the system automatically ac-
tivates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the
daytime running lights are switched on.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-
stance the ignition is automatically
switched off for the following reasons:
– Opening or closing the driver's door.
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
– When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off auto-
matically in the following situations:
– If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
the engine switched off manually.
– If the ignition is switched off manually
with the Start/Stop button.
– After approx. 8 minutes.
– When the vehicle is locked using the
central locking system.
– Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still
be started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession,
the fuel is not burned or is inadequately
burned. The catalytic converter can over-
Seite 108
CONTROLS Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
heat. There is a risk of damage to property.
Avoid repeated starting in quick succes-
sion.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full
drive power may not be available for ap-
proximately 30 seconds after starting the
engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-
celerate as usual.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Engine stop
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Seite 109
Driving CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply
the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save
fuel. The system switches off the engine
during a stop, for instance in traffic conges-
tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains
switched on. The engine starts automati-
cally for driving off.
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is
ready and is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, re-
fer to page 180, the system is automatically
activated or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically
during a stop under the following condi-
tions:
Manual transmission:
– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal
is not pressed.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission:
– The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
– The brake pedal remains depressed
while the vehicle is stopped.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake
pedal, engage the selector lever in position
P. The engine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake
pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine
starts automatically.
The air flow from the air conditioner is re-
duced when the engine is switched off.
Steptronic transmission: manual
engine stop
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, the engine can be switched
off manually, if the engine was not switched
off automatically when the vehicle stopped:
– Press the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
– Engage selector lever position P.
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Seite 110
CONTROLS Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine
start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic
engine stop have not been
met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically
in the following situations:
– External temperature too low.
– The external temperature is high and au-
tomatic climate control is running.
– The car's interior has not yet been
heated or cooled to the required level.
– The engine is not yet at operating tem-
perature.
– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
– After driving in reverse.
– Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
– The vehicle battery charge is very low.
– At higher elevations.
– The hood is unlocked.
– The parking assistant is activated.
– Stop-and-go traffic.
– Selector lever in selector lever position
R, N or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the
following conditions:
– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
– Steptronic transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically,
it will not start again automatically if any
one of the following conditions are met:
– The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
– The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the de-
activated engine starts up automatically in
the following situations:
– Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched
on.
– The steering wheel is turned.
– Steptronic transmission: change from
selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
– Steptronic transmission: change from
selector lever position P to R, N, D or
M/S.
– The vehicle begins rolling.
– Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
– The vehicle battery charge is very low.
– Excessive cooling of the car's interior
when the heating is switched on.
– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for instance if
the brake pedal is depressed a number
of times in succession.
Seite 111
Driving CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country-specific version, the vehicle fea-
tures a variety of sensors for assessing the
traffic situation. The Intelligent Auto Start/
Stop function uses this information to adapt
to various traffic situations in a proactive
manner.
For instance, this applies to the following
situations:
– If a situation is detected in which the
stopping time is expected to be very
short, the engine is not switched off au-
tomatically. A message appears on the
Control Display, depending on the situa-
tion.
– If a situation is detected in which the
vehicle needs to drive off immediately,
the engine is started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the navi-
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-
able, for example.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press the button.
– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The engine is started during an auto-
matic engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or
started via the Start/Stop button.
– LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function
is activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-
cle can be switched off permanently, for in-
stance when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated automatically for
safety reasons, for instance if no driver is
detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A
Check Control message is displayed. It is
possible to continue driving. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 112
CONTROLS Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the
parking brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking
situations, the parking brake is automati-
cally engaged, when selector lever posi-
tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-
ing brake is released automatically when
you leave the selector lever position P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a
signal sounds and the brake lights
light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 113
Driving CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete
stop, the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Manual transmission: press the
switch while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se-
lector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelera-
tor pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator under the
following conditions:
– Engine on.
– Drive mode engaged.
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission
Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen-
gages when the clutch pedal is released.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically released:
– Engine on.
– Gear engaged.
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
– Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,
secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
iting.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for
instance with a wheel chock, after existing
the vehicle.
After a power failure
Re-activating the parking brake
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to
be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-
sociated with this process are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the park-
ing brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams, head-
light flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Seite 114
CONTROLS Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Canada: the lever returns into its starting
position after actuation. To switch off man-
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
justed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you want the
turn signal to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Seite 115
Driving CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1.
– Normal wiper speed, position 2.
– Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper
system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its in-
itial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard
position, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
Seite 116
CONTROLS Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard posi-
tion.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
Seite 117
Driving CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
Seite 118
CONTROLS Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Seite 119
Driving CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor
is automatically activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Seite 120
CONTROLS Driving
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Seite 121
Driving CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point
of resistance and hold it for approx.
3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a
nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one
reservoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
centrate or the equivalent is recom-
mended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-
gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the
lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
Seite 122
CONTROLS Driving
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not add silicon-containing ad-
ditives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different wind-
shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.
Follow the information and mixing ratios
provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. When shifting
into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift
lever to the right.
Schematic diagram
– 1 – 6: forward gears
– R: reverse
Seite 123
Driving CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the
engine speed during a shifting operation is
adjusted automatically as required for har-
monious and dynamic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en-
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting
movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power, for instance in a ve-
hicle wash, or be pushed.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out
of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
transmission with either a latching selector
lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-
stalled.
Transmission with a latching selector
lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D
are selected by moving the selector lever
into the respective selector lever position.
The selector lever engages in the selector
lever positions.
Seite 124
CONTROLS Driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Transmission with a tap-operated
selector lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D
are selected by tapping the selector lever
forward or back. The selector lever automat-
ically returns to the center position when
released.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
matically, refer to page 125, in certain sit-
uations.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle
operation. All gears for forward travel are
activated automatically.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
engine power in selector lever position N,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 127.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for
parking the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in
selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a
transmission with a tap-operated selector
lever
Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
matically in situations such as the follow-
ing:
– After the engine is switched off when
the vehicle is in the radio-ready state,
refer to page 108, or when the ignition
is switched off, refer to page 107, while
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged.
– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
the driver's door is opened, and the
brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-
hicle is stationary and selector lever po-
sition D, M/S or R is engaged.
– After the ignition has been switched off
while selector lever position N is en-
gaged.
Engaging selector lever positions:
with a latching selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to
start.
Functional requirements
The selector lever can only be taken out of
selector lever position P if the ignition is on
or the engine is running.
Seite 125
Driving CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R, or P
With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
block will not be deactivated and the shift
command will not be executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position P or R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector
lever position.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with
the brake pedal depressed, press the
button on the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired
position.
Engaging selector lever positions:
with a tap-operated selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to
start.
Functional requirements
Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
possible to change from selector lever posi-
tion P to another selector lever position.
Depending on the transmission version, the
engine may have to be running too.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector
lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
briefly push the selector lever in the de-
sired direction, past a resistance point,
Seite 126
CONTROLS Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
if needed. The selector lever automati-
cally returns to the center position when
released.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a latching selector lever
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle can roll.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 130.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a tap-operated selector lever
1. Start the engine while pressing on the
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains
switched on, and a Check-Control mes-
sage is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector
lever position P is automatically engaged af-
ter approx. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock,
if needed, refer to page 130.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-
ing performance. Step on the accelerator
pedal beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
Seite 127
Driving CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier
driving style. The transmission, for instance
shifts up later and the shifting times are
shorter.
Activating the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the left from se-
lector lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is ac-
tivated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left from
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
– To shift down: press the selector lever
forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
The Steptronic transmission continues
shifting automatically in certain situations,
for instance when certain engine speed lim-
its are reached.
With a tap-operated selector lever: when
M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, the transmission will no longer
shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is
retained until you engage M1 manually or
exit M.
Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained,
M/S manual mode is automatically up-
shifted as needed.
MINI John Cooper Works: once particular
engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not
Seite 128
CONTROLS Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
automatically performed in M/S manual
mode.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-
sion, automatic shift operations are not per-
formed if one of the following conditions is
met:
– DSC is deactivated.
– TRACTION is activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for
kickdown.
With the appropriate transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected by
simultaneously activating kickdown and op-
erating the left shift paddles. This is not
possible by switching briefly via the shift
paddles from selector lever position D to
manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport
transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel al-
low you to shift gears quickly while keeping
both hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-
gine and road speeds, for instance down-
shifting is not possible if the engine speed
is too high.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a
shift paddle switches into manual mode
temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode
as follows:
– Pull and hold right shift paddle.
– In addition to the briefly pulled right
shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift
paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma-
nently.
Shifting
– To shift up: briefly pull right shift pad-
dle.
– To shift down: briefly pull left shift pad-
dle.
– The lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift pad-
dle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed by the current
gear.
Seite 129
Driving CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock
manually: with a latching selector
lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being
switched on, the brake pedal being de-
pressed and the button on the selector lever
being pressed, the transmission lock can be
unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock
manually, set the parking brake to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-
gether with the lower retaining ring,
from the center console. To do so, pull
the retaining ring upward at the rear
edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-
tor, if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 281, press
the yellow release lever downward, see
arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the se-
lector lever and move the selector lever
back slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired
position.
For additional information, see the chapter
on tow-starting and towing.
Releasing the transmission lock
electronically: with a tap-operated
selector lever
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock
to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin
the engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever,
arrow 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, ar-
Seite 130
CONTROLS Driving
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
row N, until selector lever position N is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
area and secure it against moving on its
own.
For additional information, see the chapter
on tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum accelera-
tion on surfaces with good traction under
dry surrounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes prema-
ture component wear since this function
represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the
break-in, refer to page 232, period.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv-
ing away with Launch Control.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available as soon as the
engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Depending on the external temperature and
driving style, the engine and transmission
require an interrupted trip of up to
30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-
ating temperature needed for Launch Con-
trol.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT
with the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRAC-
TION in combination with SPORT. The
DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down
on the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle posi-
tion, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts.
Within 3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the
transmission must cool down for approx.
5 minutes before Launch Control can be
used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to ach-
ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF
mode.
Seite 131
Driving CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Tachometer 137
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 137
5 Display/reset miles 137
6 Electronic displays 133
Seite 132
CONTROLS Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, for instance Check Control
Time 138
External temperature 138
Selection lists 142
Total miles/trip odometer 137
Onboard Computer 142
2 Selector lever position 124
Gear shift indicator 140
3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
tus 180
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func-
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights
and text messages in the instrument cluster
and in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-
put and a SMS text message may appear on
the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 133
Displays CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illumi-
nated: safety belt on the driver or
passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are posi-
tioned correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner
may not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, re-
fer to page 114.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue
to drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle
ahead is too small.
Increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the
imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-
tively high differential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a detected person
is imminent, the symbol lights up
and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 183.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the condi-
tions are not adequate for the system to
work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until the driver actively resumes
control of the vehicle by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may
not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
Take the longer braking distance
into account.
Have the system immediately
checked by a dealer's service center
Seite 134
CONTROLS Displays
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the
driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-
functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 178.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-
vated.
DSC, refer to page 178, and DTC, re-
fer to page 179.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss
of tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 166.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire
inflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol-
low the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then contin-
uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire
inflation pressure can be detected.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
– TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 161.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
– The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the
catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 280.
Seite 135
Displays CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-
cator light indicates that a turn sig-
nal bulb has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 114.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 151.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 154.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 153.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It main-
tains the speed that was set using
the control elements on the steering
wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 115.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the
malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
functions occur at once, the messages are
displayed consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
played again automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Seite 136
CONTROLS Displays
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will
be automatically displayed on the Control
Display.
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving
are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
The arrow beside the fuel
pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel
filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 246.
The yellow indicator light illumi-
nates, once the fuel reserve is
reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red
warning field. In this range, the fuel supply
is reduced to protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept
The total mileage driven and the mileage
driven since the last reset are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Press the button.
– The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is
switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset.
Seite 137
Displays CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
nal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
stance on bridges or shady sections of the
road. There is a risk of accident. Modify
your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is
displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
The time can be set via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Date
The date is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Range
General information
When the remaining range is low:
– A Check Control message is displayed
briefly.
– The remaining range is shown on the
Onboard Computer.
– With a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance fast cornering, the engine func-
tion is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears contin-
uously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Display
The current range is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Seite 138
CONTROLS Displays
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displaying the cruising range
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Current consumption
Concept
Displays the current fuel consumption.
Check whether you are currently driving in
an efficient and environmentally-friendly
manner.
Displaying the current
consumption
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service require-
ments and the corresponding maintenance
scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instru-
ment cluster briefly displays available driv-
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your vehicle key.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and
legally mandated inspections are dis-
played.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-
mation.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re-
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally
mandated inspection is ap-
proaching.
The service deadline has al-
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle
inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Seite 139
Displays CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
center before your vehicle is due for serv-
ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service
center was notified.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift up or down are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
road as well as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
road conditions, etc., are also detected and
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as from the rain sensor, and will be
displayed depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Seite 140
CONTROLS Displays
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Display
Speed Limit Info is displayed via the On-
board Computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed.
Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info
Display in the instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
With navigation system:
Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– When signs are fully or partially con-
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
Seite 141
Displays CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
the camera.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
– When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
– When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
– When signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-
play in the instrument cluster can be used
to display or use the following:
– Current audio source.
– Phone redial.
– Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button on the
steering wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection
down.
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Display
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such
as average values.
Seite 142
CONTROLS Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display
of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info Display
Repeatedly pressing the but-
ton on the turn signal lever
calls up the following informa-
tion in the Info Display:
– Range.
– GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
– Average consumption, fuel.
– Current consumption, fuel.
– Average speed.
– Date.
– Engine temperature display.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation:
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Speed Limit Info.
– Vehicle speed.
The unit of some information can be
changed.
Setting units, refer to page 54.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the On-
board Computer can be displayed on the
Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range avail-
able with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driv-
ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
GREEN info
The achieved range extension may be dis-
played as a bonus range.
Average consumption
This is calculated for the period while the
engine is running.
The average consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by
the Onboard Computer.
Seite 143
Displays CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with
the engine manually stopped are not in-
cluded in the calculation of the average
speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Engine temperature display
Concept
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and en-
gine oil temperature. As soon as the opti-
mum operating temperature has been at-
tained, the indicator is in the center
position.
General information
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is dis-
played.
When the engine oil temperature is
too high, a red indicator light is dis-
played.
To check the coolant level, refer to
page 277.
Display
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the
navigation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted
automatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if
a destination is entered in the navigation
system before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data on the Control Display, such as
average values.
Seite 144
CONTROLS Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa-
ble on the Control Display:
– "Onboard info": average values, such as
the consumption, are displayed. The val-
ues can be reset individually.
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if
needed.
– "Reset": all values are reset.
– "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments
can be displayed, and the vehicle state can
be checked before the use of the SPORT
program.
Sport instruments
General information
On the Control Display, values for power
and torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated
in succession:
– Range.
– Engine temperature.
– External temperature.
– SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle
state is displayed.
Seite 145
Displays CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Checking vehicle state
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached
will cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
LED ring on the central in-
strument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to
represent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for instance the tachome-
ter, can be set to be displayed continually if
so desired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed tempora-
rily, for instance the volume or temperature
settings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
function in the respective display.
Seite 146
CONTROLS Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-
ter, the light animations of the tachometer's
basic display show the current RPMs and
the respective RPM warning thresholds.
Display
– Arrow 1: current RPM.
– Arrow 2: prewarning field.
– Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
The driver can get information without
averting his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
Safety information
Warning
When extending and retracting the projec-
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the projection screen is clear during
opening and closing.
Seite 147
Displays CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTICE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place any objects on the
Head-up Display, attach to system compo-
nents or plug into the system. Do not
move the moving parts manually.
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of
the Head-up Display is extended. When
switching off, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on
the Head-up Display:
– Vehicle speed.
– Navigation instructions.
– Check Control messages.
– Selection list from the instrument clus-
ter.
– Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to
the ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be
additionally influenced using the instru-
ment lighting, refer to page 155.
Seite 148
CONTROLS Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Adjusting the height
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also
be stored using the memory function, refer
to page 98.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be
rotated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors:
– Certain sitting positions.
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play.
– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
ters.
– Wet roads.
– Unfavorable light conditions.
John Cooper Works: sport dis-
plays in the Head-up Display
General information
The sport displays in the Head-up Display
assist with a sporty driving style.
Switching on
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. "Sport displays"
With navigation system: if the sport dis-
plays are switched on, no navigation con-
tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-
play.
Seite 149
Displays CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Display
1 Vehicle speed
2 Shift point indicator
3 Gear display
4 Current engine speed
5 Warning field, speed
Shift point indicator
Concept
The shift point indicator in the Head-up
Display indicates the optimum shifting
point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the
best possible vehicle acceleration is ach-
ieved.
Functional requirements
– Steptronic Sport transmission:
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy-
namic Traction Control DTC are acti-
vated.
– Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down.
Display
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate
the upcoming shift moment.
Shift up immediately when the red fields
light up.
When the maximum speed is reached, the
entire display flashes red and the supply of
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the
engine.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of
the Flat Tire Monitor, refer
to page 166.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-
tus of the Tire Pressure
Monitor, refer to page 161.
"Engine oil level": Electronic
engine oil level check, refer
to page 273.
"Check Control": Check Con-
trol messages are stored in
the background and can be
displayed on the Control
Display. Displaying stored
Check Control messages, re-
fer to page 136.
"Service required": display-
ing service requirements,
refer to page 139.
"Teleservice Call": Serv-
ice Request.
Seite 150
CONTROLS Displays
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to
the steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Symbol Function
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the igni-
tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
periods; otherwise, the battery may become
discharged and it would then be impossible
to start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 152.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 151
Lights CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and headlight
courtesy delay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
the ambient brightness, individual light
functions may be switched on briefly when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if
the headlight flasher is switched on after
the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
Seite 152
CONTROLS Lights
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The indicator light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg-
ment of lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to de-
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-
tions, switch the lights on manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
the ignition is switched on. After the igni-
tion is switched off, the parking lights light
up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
deactivate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the currently used
vehicle key.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
ous roads or when turning, an additional,
cornering light is switched on that lights up
the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
moving below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically
switched on depending on the steering an-
gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
nals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering
lights may be automatically switched on re-
gardless of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range con-
trol
The adaptive headlight range control fea-
ture balances out acceleration and braking
processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
fic participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depend-
ing on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on, whenever the
traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
The system responds to light from oncom-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,
and to ambient lighting, for instance in
towns and cities.
Seite 153
Lights CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched
between low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated
when manually switching the high beams
on and off, refer to page 115.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,
press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-
uation that require this, therefore switch off
manually.
The system is not fully functional in the fol-
lowing situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
– In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
– When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the
roadway.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 152, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on
the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher
are activated, the front fog lights are not
switched on.
Seite 154
CONTROLS Lights
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting
controls brightness of some of these fea-
tures.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and
off manually
Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front
next to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, light-
ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
car's interior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,
until the ambient light illuminates
Seite 155
Lights CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
several times: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 156
CONTROLS Lights
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and
the front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone would
not provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side impact, the side air-
bag protects the side of the body in the
chest and lap area.
Seite 157
Safety CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Head airbag
In the event of a side impact, the head air-
bag protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re-
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
event of a frontal impact.
Protective effect
Airbags are not triggered in every impact
situation, for instance in less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the de-
ployment area of the airbags is impaired,
the airbag system cannot provide protec-
tion as intended and may cause additional
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Keep a distance from the airbags.
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the risk of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible when the airbag
is triggered.
– Make sure that the front passenger is
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
feet and legs in the floor area and does
not support them on the dashboard.
– Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
– There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
and a person.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
stance for GPS devices or mobile
phones.
– Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
on the front passenger side as a storage
area.
– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
or other objects to the front passenger
seat that are not specifically suited for
seats with integrated side airbags.
– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-
jects on the front seats that are not spe-
cifically suited for seats with integrated
side airbags.
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
– Never modify either the individual com-
ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
– Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
tions.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con-
Seite 158
CONTROLS Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Warnings and information on the airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual
components.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to fail-
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a
malfunction, the airbag system might not
trigger as intended despite the accident
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby
indicates the operational readiness of the
entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
– Warning light does not come on when
the ignition is switched on.
– The warning light lights up continu-
ously.
Automatic deactivation of the
front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to de-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and
adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
be deactivated in certain sitting positions.
In this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-
tivated and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags,
have the person sit in the rear.
Seite 159
Safety CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger
seat unless they are specifically deter-
mined to be safe for use on the front
passenger seat.
– Do not place any electronic devices on
the front passenger seat if a child re-
straint system is to be installed on it.
– Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are
either activated or deactivated.
– The indicator light lights
up when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are
not activated.
– The indicator light does not light up
when, for instance a correctly seated
person of sufficient size is detected on
the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
larly in child restraint systems required by
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
cle was manufactured. After installing a
child restraint system, make sure that the
indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-
seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for-
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Seite 160
CONTROLS Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The calibration procedure is completed
when the Check Control message disap-
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed,
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire
inflation pressure and, depending on the
model, the tire temperature.
Further information and instructions on us-
ing the system can also be found under Tire
inflation pressure, refer to page 250.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
tem is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re-
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
tion pressure losses.
Possible causes:
– Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
Additional information
The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures.
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing style or weather conditions.
Seite 161
Safety CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the
following is displayed "Resetting Tire
Pressure Monitor…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference values. The resetting process is
completed automatically while driving.
After successful completion of the reset, the
tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time.
When you continue the reset resumes auto-
matically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be
switched on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap-
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a
wheel change, but no reset was
done.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Inflation was not carried out ac-
cording to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has
fallen below the level of the last
reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Seite 162
CONTROLS Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla-
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-
sary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire
appears in a Check Control message on the
Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Seite 163
Safety CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
sure; for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstan-
ces.
Seite 164
CONTROLS Safety
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Failure performing a reset
The system does not function properly if a
reset has not been carried out, for instance
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation
pressures are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and
is then illuminated continuously. A
Check Control message is displayed.
It may not be possible to identify tire pres-
sure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
lowing situations:
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,
for instance an emergency wheel, is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
– The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
uously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
sure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Seite 165
Safety CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
ces between the individual wheels while
driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,
the diameter and therefore the rotational
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual in-
flation pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-
tialization was performed with the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was per-
formed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor
can be displayed, for instance whether the
RPA is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the
following situations:
– After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation
pressures serve as reference values in order
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving
with snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues
when driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
Seite 166
CONTROLS Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
sure; for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
Seite 167
Safety CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
– Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
– When the system has not been initial-
ized.
– When driving on a snowy or slippery
road surface.
– Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
ing).
– When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation
of the driver assistance systems.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
vent an imminent collision.
– Approach control warning with City
light braking function, refer to
page 169.
– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,
refer to page 173.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Seite 168
CONTROLS Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-
matically active after every departure. Some
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-
ing to the last setting.
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Approach control warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and
applies the brakes with limited force and
duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
Seite 169
Safety CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-
cle intentionally, the approach control warn-
ing and braking are delayed in order to
avoid false system reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an immi-
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-
ings may vary with the current driving
situation.
Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-
proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are
taken into account.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 170
CONTROLS Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarn-
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute
warning.
Brake and make an evasive ma-
neuver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is provided, for instance when
there is impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by
braking as warranted.
Seite 171
Safety CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed when there
is an imminent danger of collision due to
the vehicle approaching another object at a
high speed.
The driver must intervene actively when
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the
driver is assisted by a minor automatic
braking intervention in a possible risk of
collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-
ing force is used. In order to activate the
Brake Assistant function, you must apply
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking in-
tervention up to a complete stop, the engine
may be shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if ve-
hicle stability has not been restricted,
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter-
vention function by stepping on the acceler-
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-
ing wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be de-
tected, for example:
– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
proach them at high speed.
– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
ance.
– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
Seite 172
CONTROLS Safety
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed.
Therefore, there may also be an excess of
premature or unjustified warnings and reac-
tions.
Daytime pedestrian collision
mitigation
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents
with pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system
will issue a warning if there is imminent
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-
port this with a light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror controls the system.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli-
sion with pedestrians in the speed range
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
within the extended area only if they are
moving in the direction of the central area.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Seite 173
Safety CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The red symbol is displayed and a
signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Seite 174
CONTROLS Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-
ing force is used. In order to activate the
Brake Assistant function, you must apply
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking in-
tervention up to a complete stop, the engine
may be shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if ve-
hicle stability has not been restricted,
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter-
vention function by stepping on the acceler-
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-
ing wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim-
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be
issued late.
The following situations may not be de-
tected, for example:
– Partially covered pedestrians.
– Pedestrians that are not detected as
such because of the viewing angle or
contour.
– Pedestrians outside of the detection
range.
– Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
– When it is dark outside.
Seite 175
Safety CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Fatigue alert
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness
or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
nous trips, for instance on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing one's physical state. An increasing
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
tected or not be detected in time. There is
a risk of accident. Make sure that the
driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the en-
gine is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
into account:
– Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior.
– Driving conditions, for instance time,
length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
ommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
play with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is dis-
played only once during an uninterrupted
trip.
After a break, another recommendation to
take a break cannot be displayed until after
approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the follow-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect
warning or no warning at all:
– When the clock is set incorrectly.
– When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
ing rapid acceleration or when corner-
ing fast.
– In active driving situations, such as
when changing lanes frequently.
– When the road surface is poor.
– In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
Seite 176
CONTROLS Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
sure will be higher than the braking pres-
sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
ing function. This interrupts automatic
braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance
for an evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
– By pressing the brake pedal.
– By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 177
Safety CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power
even during full brake applications, thus in-
creasing active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-
ing capability to the furthest possible ex-
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a
minimum during an emergency stop. This
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the emergency
stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps
to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
reducing engine speed and by applying
brakes to the individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing.
– Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 179, is a version of the DSC where for-
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for in-
stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There
Seite 178
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability
is reduced during acceleration and when
driving in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-
til the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-
plays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
tion occurs in the following situations:
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
– When activating cruise control in
TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control where forward momentum is op-
timized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,
but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
– When driving off from deep snow or
loose ground.
– When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC
Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press the button.
Seite 179
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used.
ALL4
ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your
vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC
Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes
traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4
all-wheel-drive system variably distributes
the driving forces to the front and rear axles
as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
Adaptive chassis
Concept
The tuning of the suspension can be
changed with the system.
The system offers several different pro-
grams.
The programs are selected via the MINI
Driving Modes switch.
Programs
MID/GREEN
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab-
sorbers for greater driving agility.
MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
Choose between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
will activate the particular program.
Operating the programs
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
SPORT
MID
GREEN
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN, refer to page 237, provides consis-
tent tuning to maximize range.
Seite 180
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch
downward until GREEN is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
tuning of the chassis and suspension also
changes and SPORT can be individually
configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver
profile currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Configuring SPORT
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT
is activated.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driv-
ing programs in Driving mode:
– GREEN, refer to page 180.
– SPORT, refer to page 181.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving
Modes switch displays a list of
programs, which can be se-
lected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Seite 181
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a
firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
Seite 182
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Camera-based cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac-
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as
the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the
respective speed.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you
brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive
again shortly thereafter, the system is able
to detect this within the given system lim-
its.
General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to
detect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the settings, the characteris-
tics of cruise control many change in cer-
tain ranges.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
justed or called up by mistake. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed
to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
– When fast approaching a slowly mov-
ing vehicle.
– Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
Seite 183
Driving comfort CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively inter-
vene where appropriate.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 185.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 185.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 185.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 186.
Reduce distance, refer to
page 186.
Increase the distance, refer to
page 186.
Button Function
Increase speed, refer to
page 185.
Reduce speed, refer to page 185.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country speci-
fications.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: the system can also be acti-
vated while the vehicle is stationary.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control
is interrupted below a speed of approx.
20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not
brake to a stop.
Seite 184
CONTROLS Driving comfort
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster
lights up.
Display in the instrument cluster
lights up. The current speed is
adopted as desired speed and dis-
played with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: when switching off while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-
neously.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: when interrupting while sta-
tionary, depress the brake pedal simultane-
ously.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
– Manual transmission: when the clutch
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or
released while a gear is not engaged.
– If selector lever position N is set.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
– If the detection range of the camera is
impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
precipitation or glare effects from the
sun.
– Manual transmission: if the vehicle in
front decelerates below a speed of ap-
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.
– With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions: following a sta-
tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-
ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by
the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted
state.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the
symbol.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press the button.
Seite 185
Driving comfort CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to
the system limits, braking can be late.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Be aware to the traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the instrument
cluster.
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the instrument
cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed
value is deleted and cannot be called up
again:
– When the system is switched off.
– When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up the stored speed and
distance
Press the button with the system in-
terrupted. Cruise control is contin-
ued with the stored values. The se-
lected distance is briefly displayed in the
Info Display.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains
the stored speed. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ad-
Seite 186
CONTROLS Driving comfort
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
just the desired speed to the traffic condi-
tions and brake as needed.
Switching distance control off
Distance control can be switched off and on
when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button.
Or:
Press and hold this button.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press
one of the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a
Check Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
In addition to the indicator light, the
desired speed is displayed in the Info
Display.
– Display lights up green: system is active,
the display indicates the desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
– No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand
portion of the Info Display.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically af-
ter the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions:
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle
has driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-
vate ACC as follows:
– By briefly pressing the accelerator
pedal.
– By pressing the RES CNCL button.
– By pressing the or button.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Seite 187
Driving comfort CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup-
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de-
tected.
Distance control is temporarily sup-
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was
detected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control
can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
play.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and
the automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
not be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the fol-
lowing situations:
– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
slow-moving road users.
– For red traffic lights.
– For cross traffic.
– For oncoming traffic.
– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
ing lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-
tected until it is completely within the same
lane as your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not
be able to automatically restore the selected
distance. It may not be possible to restore
the selected distance in certain situations,
including if you are driving significantly
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you
is reliably detected, the system requests
that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
With the Stop&Go function for
Steptronic transmissions: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
off automatically; for example:
– On steep uphill grades.
– In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator
pedal.
Seite 188
CONTROLS Driving comfort
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri-
ate speed.
The system has a limited detection range.
Situations can arise in tight curves where a
vehicle driving ahead will not be detected
or will be detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
celerates you may compensate it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under
unfavorable weather or light conditions:
– Poorer vehicle recognition.
– Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light
conditions:
– Wet conditions.
– Snowfall.
– Slush.
– Fog.
– Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
tively, for instance by braking, steering or
evading.
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained
on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-
cient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails or was automatically deacti-
vated.
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– When an object was not correctly de-
tected.
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– When driving toward bright lights.
– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the
engine, via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 189
Driving comfort CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be
adjusted using the buttons on the steering
wheel. The system maintains the desired
speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
trol settings many change under certain
conditions.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following
situations, for instance:
– On winding roads.
– In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 190.
Store speed, refer to page 191.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 190.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 191.
Increase speed, refer to
page 191.
Reduce speed, refer to page 191.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the
desired speed and is displayed with
the symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Seite 190
CONTROLS Driving comfort
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Switching off
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on
the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
– If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not
engaged.
– If the gear engaged is too high for the
current speed.
– If selector lever position N is set.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted
state.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press the button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
– or button: pressing it to the re-
sistance point and holding it accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without re-
quiring pressure on the accelerator
pedal. After the button is released, the
vehicle maintains its final speed. Press-
ing the switch beyond the resistance
point causes the vehicle to accelerate
more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
Calling up the stored speed
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main-
tained.
Seite 191
Driving comfort CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is
equipped, the indicator light in the
instrument cluster indicates whether
the system is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed to-
gether with the symbol.
– Display lights up green: system is
active, the display indicates the
desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
– No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained down-
hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
grades if engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
distances are located in the bumpers.
The delete range, depending on obstacles
and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
– By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-
cle surroundings closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Avoid approaching an object
too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
Park Distance Control is not yet active.
Seite 192
CONTROLS Driving comfort
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
– If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-
tected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the
Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
the park assistance button.
Warning
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-
hicle is approaching an object. For instance,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left
rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous
tone is sounded.
Seite 193
Driving comfort CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
With front PDC: if objects are simultane-
ously located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-
nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selec-
tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles
with Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects
that are farther away are already displayed
on the Control Display before a signal
sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in
colors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is
displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function
under the following circumstances:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
Seite 194
CONTROLS Driving comfort
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the
following conditions even though there is
no obstacle within the detection range:
– In heavy rain.
– When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
– On rough road surfaces.
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
– In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in under-
ground garages.
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– Due to heavy exhaust.
– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
stance sweeping machines, high pres-
sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a contin-
uous tone alternating between the front
and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-
function due to other ultrasound sources
is no longer present, the system is again
fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes; see Switching on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on
the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is shown on the
Control Display.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-
cle surroundings closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
button in the vehicle
Seite 195
Driving comfort CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located between the li-
cense plate lights.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if
selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central
Information Display (CID)
If the rearview camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via the Central In-
formation Display (CID):
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
– The rearview camera is switched on.
– Split doors are completely closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
clear.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc-
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be
active at the same time.
– Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-
cated.
– Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Seite 196
CONTROLS Driving comfort
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the
space required when parking and maneu-
vering on level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steer-
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed
on the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
tain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-
cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
radius lines lead to within the limits of
the parking space.
Seite 197
Driving comfort CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point
where the pathway line covers the cor-
responding turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
fore, do not estimate the distance from the
objects on the display.
The bumper of the vehicle is not visible in
the camera picture. Therefore do not drive
closer toward an obstacle than shown by
the marks in the camera picture, even if the
camera picture still shows a gap between
the vehicle and the obstacle.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking
parallel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into
three steps:
– Switching on and activating.
– Parking space search.
– Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Seite 198
CONTROLS Driving comfort
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-
ing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
For measuring parking spaces
– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
– Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
– Doors and split doors are closed.
Seite 199
Driving comfort CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– The parking brake is released.
– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
cally.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not availa-
ble.
White: the system is available
but not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-
ing assistant is activated and the park-
ing space search is active.
– Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to
the vehicle symbol. When the parking
assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
– The parking procedure is
active. Steering control
has been taken over by
system.
– Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti-
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 200. Ac-
tivate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
Seite 200
CONTROLS Driving comfort
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
and at a distance of maximum
5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the display, refer to page 200.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the station-
ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is in-
dicated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time:
– Press the park assistance button.
– "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
the following situations:
– If the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
– If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the display.
– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
– If a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is
exceeded.
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-
plays clearances that are too small.
– When switching into other functions of
the radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be
continued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 200, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
– Press the park assistance button.
– Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis-
tance in the following situations:
– In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
– On slippery ground.
Seite 201
Driving comfort CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space.
– With a mounted emergency wheel.
– With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function
under the following circumstances:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 202
CONTROLS Driving comfort
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
– Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
– Microfilter.
– Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-
air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
– Automatic climate control.
– Parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow
Seite 203
Climate control CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 94
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 94
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn the wheel for air flow all
the way to the left.
Temperature
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the
set temperature.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the de-
sired temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is
started.
The air conditioner produces condensation
water, refer to page 235, that will exit from
below the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recir-
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply
of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the external temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
window fogging increases.
Seite 204
CONTROLS Climate control
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
The higher the air flow, the
more effective the heating or
cooling will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be
reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the
desired program or the desired
intermediate setting.
– Windows.
– Upper body region.
– Floor area.
– Windows, upper body region, and
floor area.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the
windows and remove condensation:
– Direct the air distribution onto the win-
dows.
– Increasing the air flow.
– Increase the temperature.
– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-
ing output is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter filters dust and pollen from the
air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 279.
Seite 205
Climate control CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 94
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 To defrost windows and remove conden-
sation
15 Seat heating, left 94
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the
left until the control switches
off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
Seite 206
CONTROLS Climate control
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
necessary by using the maximum cooling or
heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the de-
sired temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different
temperature settings. The automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is
started.
The cooling function is switched on auto-
matically with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 235, de-
velops and drains underneath the vehicle.
This is normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
General information
The function is available with external tem-
peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and
with the engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
gram active.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
heats the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically depending on the
temperature in the car's interior and the de-
sired temperature setting including the se-
lected intensity of the air flow.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
Seite 207
Climate control CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
air is directed to the windshield, side win-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Point the side vents toward the side win-
dows.
The following features are switched on au-
tomatically with the AUTO program:
– The air conditioning, refer to page 207.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the au-
tomatic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired intensity from soft to in-
tensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi-
tion of the illuminated LED segment.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the out-
side air. The outside air supply is shut off
and the interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects
pollutants in the outside air and controls the
shut-off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air con-
tinuously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
window fogging increases.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
– LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-
ously.
– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and shuts off automati-
cally.
– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is
permanently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the external temperature.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculating mode and press the AUTO but-
ton. Make sure that air can flow to the
windshield.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off
AUTO program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
Seite 208
CONTROLS Climate control
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
via illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate con-
trol may be reduced automatically to save
battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
Operation
Press the button repeatedly to se-
lect a program:
– Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
– Upper body region and floor area.
– Floor area.
– Windows and floor area.
– Windows.
– Windows and upper body region.
– Upper body region.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
gram active.
If there is window condensation, switch on
the air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-
ing output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 279.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually
adjusted:
– Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools no-
ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
perature.
– Indirect ventilation:
Seite 209
Climate control CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
air is directly routed into the car's inte-
rior.
Front ventilation
– Turn knob for continuous opening and
closing of the vents.
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of
the vent flow, arrows.
Ventilation in the rear
– Lever for changing the air flow direc-
tion, arrow 1.
– Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the
car's interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched
on and off directly or by using two preset
activation times. The system remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is oper-
ated via the Central Information Display
(CID).
Functional requirements
– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-
ready state.
– Direct operation or preset activation
time: does not depend on external tem-
perature.
– Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on,
the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Thus, limit the maximum activation time
to save the vehicle battery. The system
will be available again after the engine
is started or after a short trip.
– Make sure that the vehicle's date and
time are set correctly.
– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate
control flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 210
CONTROLS Climate control
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control lights up when the activation time is
activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within
the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be
reactivated.
Seite 211
Climate control CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-
tions of remote-controlled systems such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled sys-
tems with the integrated universal remote
control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
coming jammed in a garage door. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
system to be controlled, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated
Universal Remote Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
– A dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
– www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
tex Corporation.
Seite 212
CONTROLS Interior equipment
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter
must be fully charged at the time of pro-
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the
integrated universal remote control.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be
programmed. The LED on the interior
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the
interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
– The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
– LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other but-
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system af-
ter repeated programming, please check if
the system to be controlled features a roll-
ing code radio system.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
trol and the system also have to be
synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
Seite 213
Interior equipment CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the inte-
rior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-
ton on the system being programmed,
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.
30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If neces-
sary, repeat this step up to three times
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro-
grammed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-
onds, release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the
interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
– The LED lights up green: the pro-
gramming procedure is completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but pro-
gramming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
– LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not com-
pleted, the previous programming will re-
main unchanged.
Operation
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled sys-
tems with the integrated universal remote
control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
coming jammed in a garage door. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior
mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
system until the function is activated. The
interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
less signal is being transmitted.
Seite 214
CONTROLS Interior equipment
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-
terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by press-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
refer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 215
Interior equipment CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the
control button quickly and repeatedly
until the number of the compass zone
that corresponds with your location ap-
pears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The
compass is ready for use again after approx-
imately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following:
– The wrong compass point is displayed.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel.
– Not all points of the compass are dis-
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
lic objects or overhead power lines near
the vehicle and that there is sufficient
room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
Seite 216
CONTROLS Interior equipment
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
control button again to switch between
English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor
behind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal
cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
the center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the objects. There is a risk of
fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
to property. Take hold of the cigarette
lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket
for electrical equipment while the ignition
is switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Seite 217
Interior equipment CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in
the cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with a USB port can be con-
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the con-
nection of mobile devices to the USB inter-
face in the section on USB connections, re-
fer to page 60.
Seite 218
CONTROLS Interior equipment
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
In the front center console
The USB interface is located in the front of
the center console.
Properties:
– USB port Type A.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
In the rear center console
One USB dual charge socket is located in
the rear center console.
Properties:
– USB port Type C.
– For charging of mobile devices.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
Under the center armrest
The USB interface is located under the cen-
ter armrest.
Properties:
– USB port Type C.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
Seite 219
Interior equipment CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
– Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
– Compartments in the doors.
– Storage compartment in the center arm-
rest.
– Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
– Clothes hooks
– Storage compartments in the cargo area.
– Storage tray in the center console.
– Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury. Always close the glove compart-
ment immediately after using it.
Seite 220
CONTROLS Storage compartments
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
Center armrest
General information
Two storage compartments are located in
the center armrest.
Opening
Upper storage compartment: press button,
arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, ar-
row 2.
Lower storage compartment: press button,
arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, ar-
row 2.
Seite 221
Storage compartments CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cup holders
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be thrown
about the car’s interior in the event of an
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
the traffic conditions and lead to an acci-
dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
ages.
Front
In the center console.
Rear
General information
The cup holder is located in the center arm-
rest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Safety information
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center arm-
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a
risk of damage to property. Press back the
covers before the center armrest is folded
up.
Clothes hooks
General information
The clothes hooks are located above the
rear doors.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
that they will not obstruct the driver's
view.
Seite 222
CONTROLS Storage compartments
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
Seite 223
Storage compartments CONTROLS
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud-
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving
characteristics may be negatively im-
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
ing the braking distances and changing
the steering response. There is a risk of
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
stance in the event of an accident or dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi-
cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.
NOTICE
The cargo floor panel is designed for a par-
ticular maximum weight. Weight that is
too high and that is selective can damage
the cargo floor panel. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not exceed the
maximum load of the cargo area floor and
evenly distribute the cargo across the
cargo area floor.
The maximum load is 881 lbs / 440 kg.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
Seite 224
CONTROLS Cargo area
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight
of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants,
the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
sible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
– If necessary, fold down the rear back-
rests to stow large cargo.
– Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
With cargo area partition net: to secure the
cargo there are six lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Seite 225
Cargo area CONTROLS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Cargo cover
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Closing
NOTICE
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Hook the cargo cover on both
sides.
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook
both sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Opening
Warning
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can
jam body parts or cause damage. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not let the cargo cover snap back
into place.
Pull over the cargo cover and hook into the
brackets on both sides.
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover
can be removed.
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull
the cargo cover out towards the rear, ar-
row 2.
Installing
Slide the cargo cover in until it engages on
both sides with an audible click.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Side storage compartments
Storage compartments are located on the
left and right sides.
Seite 226
CONTROLS Cargo area
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Storage compartments in the split
doors
There are storage compartments in the split
doors.
Multi-function hook
Warning
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers,
for example. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, such as shopping
bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the cargo area
if it has been appropriately secured.
A multi-function hook is available on the
right side of the cargo area.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
– The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two
parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat
backrest is connected to the center section.
With through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided into three parts at a
40-20-40 ratio. The side rear seat backrests
and the center section can be folded down
separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear backrest and
the of the head restraint is clear prior to
folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
Warning
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the
protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. If you are using
the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
seat backrest.
Seite 227
Cargo area CONTROLS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat
backrest from the rear
1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded
down, fold in the center head restraint if
necessary.
2. Press the switch and pull the rear seat
backrest forward.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position.
Adjusting
1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat
backrest.
Folding down the center section
1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Press the switch and pull the center sec-
tion forward.
Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
caught behind the backrest or in between
the backrest and the rear seats.
Seite 228
CONTROLS Cargo area
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Variable cargo area floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to
transport requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 224.
Removing the cargo floor panel
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor
panel upward.
2. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear
and fold slightly upward.
3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets.
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall the
cargo area floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneu-
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property.
– Do not use the variable cargo floor
panel to separate the cargo area and
car's interior in the sense of a parti-
tion net.
– Only use the variable cargo floor
panel in the folded-up position when
the backrests are folded up and
locked.
– Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
– Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
for instance.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
Fold up the cargo floor panel and press be-
hind the locks on the left and right, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Seite 229
Cargo area CONTROLS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving .................................................. 232
Saving fuel ............................................................................................... 236
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working to-
gether smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-
ciency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch
Control, refer to page 131.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of accident.
After installing new parts or with a new
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break-
in procedures of the respective parts and
components.
Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and
road speed:
– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-
cumstances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually
be increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its opti-
mal level only after a distance driven of ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-
in period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
Seite 232
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
above have to be renewed in the course of
the vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing split doors
Safety information
Warning
An open split door protrudes from the ve-
hicle and can endanger occupants and
other road users or damage the vehicle in
the event of an accident, braking or eva-
sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust
fumes may enter the car's interior. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not drive with split doors
open.
Driving with the split doors open
If nevertheless you need to drive with split
doors open:
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
– Greatly increase the air flow from the
vents.
– Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
Warning
During driving operation, high tempera-
tures can occur underneath the vehicle
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
gas system. If combustible materials, such
as leaves or grass, come in contact with
hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these
materials can ignite. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make
sure that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in
driving operation, idle or during parking.
Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.
Mobile communication devices in
the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mo-
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. If possible, in
the car's interior use only mobile phones
with direct connections to an exterior an-
tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
ence and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
can form between the tires and road sur-
face.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing. It is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires
and the road surface, ultimately undermin-
ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
cle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Drive through calm water only.
– Drive through water only if it is not
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
– Drive through water no faster than
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 233
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the en-
gine compartment, the electrical system or
the transmission. There is a risk of damage
to property. When driving through water,
do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-
ter level and the maximum speed for driv-
ing through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a
standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations
that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still
avoid any obstacles with a minimum of
steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
able when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in
the gear that requires least braking effort.
Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-
duce brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first
gear, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing
out and possibly even brake failure. There
is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-
sive stress on the brake system.
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking assistance and
steering assistance, may not be available.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt
Seite 234
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
to drive in idle state or with the engine
switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-
nation on the brake pads are increased by
the following circumstances:
– Low mileage.
– Extended periods when the vehicle is
not used at all.
– Infrequent use of the brakes.
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
their response - generally this cannot be
corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTICE
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
curbs or underground garage entrances,
contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,
and the underbody may occur. There is a
risk of damage to property. Ensure that
there is sufficient ground clearance availa-
ble.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accesso-
ries.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the
roof rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
they have a major effect on vehicle handling
and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
– The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
– Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
corners gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty.
The vehicle is not designed for use in motor
sports competition.
Seite 235
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of consumption and emis-
sion values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of
different factors.
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
influence fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consump-
tion.
Remove attached parts follow-
ing use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or
rear luggage racks which are no longer re-
quired following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-
sumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
resistance and thus raises fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up
while the vehicle remains stationary. Start
driving right away, but at moderate engine
speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine
to reach its operating temperature.
Seite 236
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-
ing.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel
consumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 140.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your
foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle
coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the ac-
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast-
ing.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops,
for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-
ings or in traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle
automatically switches off the engine dur-
ing a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then re-
started rather than leaving the engine run-
ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-
sions are reduced. Savings can begin within
a few seconds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-
mined by other factors, such as driving
style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-
ronmental factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy
and consume additional fuel, especially in
city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
refer to page 279.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
engine control and comfort features, for in-
stance the climate control output, are ad-
justed.
For Steptronic transmission:
Seite 237
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Under certain conditions the engine is auto-
matically decoupled from the transmission
in the D selector lever position. The vehicle
continues traveling with the engine idling
to reduce consumption. The D selector lever
position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions
are displayed to assist with an efficient
driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following MINI-
MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-
plays:
– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 239.
– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 239.
– GREEN climate control, refer to
page 238.
– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to
page 241.
– Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 240.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until
GREEN is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/
deactivated:
– "GREEN speed warning"
– "GREEN climate control"
– "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
GREEN Limit
– Activate the GREEN Limit:
"GREEN speed warning":
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tem-
perature, or adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
terior mirror is reduced.
Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
the engine and coasting, refer to page 240,
with the engine idling.
This function is only available in GREEN
Mode.
Seite 238
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Deactivate the function to use the braking
effect of the engine when traveling down-
hill.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
A modified driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
The range extension can be
displayed as the bonus range
in the instrument cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range dis-
play.
The bonus range is automatically reset ev-
ery time the vehicle is refueled.
– Green display: efficient driving style.
– Gray display: modify driving style, for
instance by backing off the accelerator
pedal.
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instru-
ment cluster indicates your
current driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered
by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display
when accelerating.
The efficiency of your driving style is
shown by the position of the mark:
– Mark inside the green range: efficient
driving style.
– Mark outside the green range: modify
driving style, for example by backing off
the accelerator.
GREEN tip, driving instruction
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
style can be modified to be more efficient,
for example by backing off the accelerator.
Activating/deactivating the display
Activate information relating to the driving
style and GREEN tips in the instrument
cluster using the Central Information Dis-
play (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions
are displayed.
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style,
look well ahead when driving,
accelerate conservatively, and
delay accelerating.
Reduce speed to the selected
GREEN speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
manual shift interventions.
Seite 239
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Symbol Measure
Manual transmission:
Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission:
Engage neutral for an engine
stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM information
The current efficiency of the functions in
GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con-
trol Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
Information is shown on the following func-
tions:
– Auto Start/Stop function.
– Energy recovery.
– Climate control output.
– Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Further information on the MINIMALISM
analyzer, refer to page 241.
Open GREEN Tip display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "GREEN tips"
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the en-
gine is automatically decoupled from the
transmission when selector lever position D
is set. The vehicle continues traveling with
the engine idling to reduce consumption.
Selector lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as
coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-
ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-
pled again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the GREEN driv-
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when
the GREEN driving mode is called via the
MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to
page 180.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to
use the function often and supports the effi-
cient effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range
from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
100 mph/160 km/h.
– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are
not operated.
– The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
– Engine and transmission are at operat-
ing temperature.
– With a camera in the area of the interior
mirror: the system does not detect any
vehicles ahead of you.
Seite 240
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the
shift paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the
right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The bar display below the
tachometer is filled in green
and the mark appears at the
zero point. The tachometer
shows the idle speed.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed
in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.
The distance traveled in the coasting driv-
ing condition is indicated by a counter.
Displaying MINIMALISM information
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
System limits
The function is not available if one of the
following conditions applies:
– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
– Cruise control is activated.
– If driving in the dynamic limit range.
– If driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades.
– The battery charge state is temporarily
too low.
– The vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.
MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept
The function helps develop an especially ef-
ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is ana-
lyzed. The assessment is done in various
categories and is displayed on the Control
Display.
This display will help you adjust your driv-
ing style and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style. This gain
in range is displayed as a bonus range in the
instrument cluster and on the Control Dis-
play.
Functional requirement
This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of
values and the display of the achieved bo-
nus range.
Seite 241
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The fish and the movements of the water in
the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less
the water sloshes around in the bowl and
the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number
of stars is displayed.
The table of values contains stars and evalu-
ates the driving style in different catego-
ries. The more efficient the driving style,
the more stars are displayed in the table.
The bonus range achieved by a driving style
that minimizes consumption is displayed
below the table of values. The more effi-
cient the driving style, the faster the bonus
range increases.
To assist with an efficient driving style,
GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-
ing fuel, refer to page 236.
Seite 242
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Seite 243
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
MOBILITY
Refueling .................................................................................................. 246
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 248
Wheels and tires .................................................................................... 250
Engine compartment ............................................................................ 270
Engine oil ................................................................................................. 273
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 277
Maintenance ........................................................................................... 279
Replacing components ......................................................................... 281
Breakdown assistance .......................................................................... 291
Care ............................................................................................................ 299
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 248, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap
opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 246
MOBILITY Refueling
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The
cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel
vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Pay atten-
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed
or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-
gages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-
stance with an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the following when re-
fueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle
completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the
fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:
– Premature switching off.
– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-
erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions
warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm
the environment. There is a risk of damage
to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 247
Refueling MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available
in winter, for instance helps make a cold
start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as
containing metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-
eling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in
each case.
Safety information
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
lytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not refuel or add the following in the case
of gasoline engines:
– Leaded gasoline.
– Metallic additives, for instance man-
ganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher
percentage of ethanol than recommended.
Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-
nol, e.g. M5 to M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini-
mum quality can compromise engine func-
tion or cause engine damage. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not fill with
fuel that does not comply with the mini-
mum quality.
Seite 248
MOBILITY Fuel
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling, especially under cer-
tain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high alti-
tude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered,
we recommend switching to a high quality
gasoline brand and a higher octane grade
— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly
recommended to purchase gasoline from
Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for unsched-
uled maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
MINI recommends AKI 93.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the
rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
John Cooper Works:
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high external tem-
peratures. This has no effect on the engine
life.
Seite 249
Fuel MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation
pressure influence the following:
– The service life of the tires.
– Road safety.
– Driving comfort.
– Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and
sustain damage. This will have a negative
impact on aspects of handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
inflation pressure, and correct it as
needed, for instance twice a month and be-
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 251, contains all tire inflation pres-
sure specifications for the specified tire
sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
– Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
perature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in
the tire inflation pressure table only relate
to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
Seite 250
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine the intended tire inflation
pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates
from the intended tire inflation pres-
sure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are
screwed onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure of
the emergency wheel
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-
larly, and correct it as needed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and
for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-
sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-
ble, refer to page 251, and adjust as neces-
sary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
er's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Tire pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER, COOPER ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
205/55 R 16 91
V A/S
225/45 R 17 91
V A/S
205/55 R 16 91
W
205/55 R 16 91
H M+S
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
Seite 251
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
225/45 R 17 94
Y XL
225/40 R 18 92
Y XL
225/40 ZR 18
92 Y XL
195/60 R 16 89
H M+S
195/55 R 17 92
H XL M+S
225/40 R 18 92
V XL M+S
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
235/35 R 19 91
Y XL
205/45 R 18 90
H XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
Emergency
wheel
T 125/70 R 17
98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/45 R 17
91 V A/S
225/45 R 17
94 Y XL
225/45 R 17
91 H M+S
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/40 R 18
92 Y XL
225/40 ZR 18
92 Y XL
235/35 R 19
91 Y XL
195/55 R 17
92 H XL M+S
225/40 R 18
92 V XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
205/45 R 18
90 H XL M+S
2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
Emergency
wheel
T 125/70 R 17
98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
JOHN COOPER WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI
with cold tires
225/40 R 18
92 Y XL
235/35 R 19
91 Y XL
225/40 R 18
92 V XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
205/45 R 18
90 H XL M+S
2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
Seite 252
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Warning
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-
serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-
sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h from the relevant table on the
following pages. Otherwise, tire damage
and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table,
refer to page 253, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER, COOPER ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
205/55 R 16 91
V A/S
225/45 R 17 91
V A/S
205/55 R 16 91
W
205/55 R 16 91
H M+S
225/45 R 17 91
H M+S
225/45 R 17 94
Y XL
225/40 R 18 92
Y XL
225/40 ZR 18
92 Y XL
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Seite 253
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
195/60 R 16 89
H M+S
195/55 R 17 92
H XL M+S
225/40 R 18 92
V XL M+S
235/35 R 19 91
Y XL
205/45 R 18 90
H XL M+S
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Emergency
wheel
T 125/70 R 17
98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/45 R 17
91 V A/S
225/45 R 17
94 Y XL
225/45 R 17
91 H M+S
225/40 R 18
92 Y XL
225/40 ZR 18
92 Y XL
235/35 R 19
91 Y XL
195/55 R 17
92 H XL M+S
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
205/45 R 18
90 H XL M+S
3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
225/40 R 18
92 V XL M+S
3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46
Emergency
wheel
T 125/70 R 17
98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
JOHN COOPER WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI
with cold tires
225/40 R 18
92 Y XL
235/35 R 19
91 Y XL
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
205/45 R 18
90 H XL M+S
3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
225/40 R 18
92 V XL M+S
3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
Seite 254
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire
loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 2119
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2119: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines
of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the
tire on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 2119 21st week, 2019
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. E.g., a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
half, 1 g, times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
Seite 255
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest,
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
creased risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re-
quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Seite 256
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread
wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-
cles can cause serious damage to wheels,
tires and suspension parts. This is more
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which
provide less cushioning between the wheel
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-
ards and reduce your speed, especially if
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations.
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following sit-
uations, for instance:
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage.
– Tire inflation pressure too low.
– Vehicle overloading.
– Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
age is suspected while driving,
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have
wheels and tires checked. For this pur-
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed
or transported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
damage. There is a danger of accidents and
property damage. If possible, avoid driving
over objects or road conditions that may
damage tires, or drive over them slowly
and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
vehicle, for instance due to contact with
the body due to tolerances despite the
same official size rating. There is a risk of
an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
Seite 257
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
hicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's
handling and on the function of a variety
of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake
System or Dynamic Stability Control.
There is a risk of accident. To maintain
good handling and vehicle response, use
only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufac-
turer of the vehicle recommends that you
use wheels and tires that have been rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer
for your vehicle type. Following tire dam-
age, have the original wheel/tire combina-
tion remounted on the vehicle as soon as
possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
ing structures. With advanced age the
service life can be limited. There is a risk
of an accident. The manufacturer of your
vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
treaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not
recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operat-
ing on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-
vide better winter traction than summer
tires, they usually do not provide the same
level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of
view. The label is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do
not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires
For your own safety, use only runflat tires.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
tire. Further information is available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 258
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
wear. Further information is available from
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct, if
needed.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-
der restricted conditions even in the event
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are
self-supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driv-
ing with a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-
sure; for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall
with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
Seite 259
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility System found on the compres-
sor and sealant container.
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– The use of a sealant can damage the
TPM wheel electronics. In this case,
have the TPM wheel electronics re-
placed at the next opportunity.
– The compressor can be used to check
the tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is in a bag on the left
side of the cargo area.
Sealant container
– Sealant container, arrow 1.
– Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
tainer.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Seite 260
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not run the compres-
sor for more than 10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the
cover of the sealant container. Do not
kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the
holder on the compressor housing, en-
suring that it engages audibly.
Seite 261
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-
tainer onto the tire valve of the non-
working wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, in-
sert the plug into the power socket in-
side the vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the
cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 262
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
4. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar cannot be reached, contact your
dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant
is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less
than 12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
– Increase tire inflation pressure: with
the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the com-
pressor.
– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 263
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 166.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 161.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on un-
suitable tires, the snow chains can come
into contact with vehicle parts. There may
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
property. Only mount snow chains on tires
that are designated by their manufacturer
as suitable for the use of snow chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam-
age tires and vehicle components. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the snow
chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-
tighten as needed according to the snow
chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer-
tain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of the ve-
hicle and recommended as road-safe and
suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains
is available from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-
ped with the tires of the following size:
– 195/60 R 16.
– 195/55 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may re-
sult in incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting snow chains, as doing so
may result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-
tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if
needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-
flation pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-
Seite 264
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
potential to exert too much strain on the
vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
turer, is provided in order to perform a
wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use;
for example, changing from summer to
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
cause it to become jammed or damaged.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
emergency or spare wheel in the event of
a breakdown.
Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
and slip-resistant surface.
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on
the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
the vehicle jack.
Warning
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose,
the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle
jack may slip when it is being cranked up.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. When cranking up the vehicle
jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack-
ing point next to the wheel housing.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. While the ve-
hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to
additionally secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away when changing a wheel.
Seite 265
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects
in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
nal to the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles
against the rolling direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding.
The lug bolts can only be released with the
adapter which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in
the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 281.
– Lug bolt, arrow 1.
– Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing
the lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits
on the lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening
torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Set the parking brake.
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
Seite 266
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Depending on the vehicle equipment,
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
injury. Comply with the described hand
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
gular recess of the jacking point closest
to the wheel to be changed.
Seite 267
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle
jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
load and continue turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and at a right angle be-
neath the jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and perpendicularly be-
neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle
jack is with the entire surface on the
ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-
mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer's service center or an-
Seite 268
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency
wheel can be used in place of the wheel
with the defective tire. The emergency
wheel is only intended for temporary use
until the defective tire/wheel has been re-
placed.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-
larly, and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning
The emergency wheel has particular di-
mensions. When driving with an emer-
gency wheel, changed driving properties
may occur, for instance reduced lane sta-
bility when braking, longer braking dis-
tance, and changed self-steering proper-
ties in the limit area. There is a risk of
accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-
ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor
panel.
2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Where applicable, remove the holder
and the trailer hitch.
5. Remove the jacking point and the tool
holder on the left next to the emergency
wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left
and remove it.
Inserting the emergency wheel
1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left
and slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and
the trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly
screw.
5. Insert and secure the jacking point and
the tool holder on the left next to the
emergency wheel.
6. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Seite 269
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir
Seite 270
MOBILITY Engine compartment
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to
property. Have work in the engine com-
partment performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move
with the vehicle switched off, for instance
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the hood is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage
the hood. There is a risk of damage to
property. Open the hood again and then
close it energetically. Avoid pressing
again.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Seite 271
Engine compartment MOBILITY
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 272
MOBILITY Engine compartment
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil
level after refueling by taking a detailed
measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for instance:
– Sporty driving style.
– Break-in of the engine.
– Idling of the engine.
– With use of engine oil types that are
classified as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear,
depending on the engine oil level.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not add too
much engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-
rected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two
measuring principles:
– Monitoring.
– Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance when taking curves aggressively,
regularly perform a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electroni-
cally while driving and can be shown on the
Control Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis-
sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that
the engine oil pressure is too low.
Seite 273
Engine oil MOBILITY
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a measured value.
In this case, the measured value for the last,
sufficiently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the ve-
hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis-
sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is
increased somewhat.
Functional requirements
– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-
tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-
als not depressed.
– Steptronic transmission: selector lever
in selector lever position N or P and ac-
celerator pedal not depressed.
– Engine is running and is at operating
temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and dis-
played via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The
quantity to be added is indicated in the
message displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer
to page 275.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-
ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Follow the instructions
on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-
ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-
ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-
rials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
Seite 274
MOBILITY Engine oil
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not add too
much engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-
rected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine
compartment, refer to page 270.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 271.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life
of the engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are
listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use oil additives.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a
risk of damage to property. When select-
ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-
gine oil has the correct oil rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil
rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an
engine oil with the following oil rating can
be added:
Seite 275
Engine oil MOBILITY
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-
lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings
and viscosity grades of engine oils can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear
and thus engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not exceed the
service data indicated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
change the engine oil.
Seite 276
MOBILITY Engine oil
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about
suitable additives is available from a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling sys-
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only
open the cooling system with the engine
cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
tives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not allow additives to come into
contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-
ing. Use suitable additives only.
Coolant level
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 271.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
Seite 277
Coolant MOBILITY
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-
tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 271.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
Seite 278
MOBILITY Coolant
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby pro-
vides support in maintaining road safety
and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work,
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
materials are calculated separately. Further
information is available from a dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to
your user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer
to page 139, can be displayed on the Control
Display.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
dealer’s service center can read this data
out and suggest an optimized maintenance
scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop update the time-dependent mainte-
nance procedures, such as checking brake
fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine
oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter.
Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models
and Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Please consult your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models for additional information
on service requirements.
Seite 279
Maintenance MOBILITY
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-
nosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is
locked. Remove any devices connected at
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for On-
board Diagnosis, or contact with the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
for checking the primary components in the
vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
– The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the
catalytic converter.
Seite 280
MOBILITY Maintenance
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle tool kit
The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool
kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
installed. There is a risk of damage to
property. Hold the wiper firmly when
changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or
switch on the wiper without a wiper blade
installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Seite 281
Replacing components MOBILITY
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Replacing rear wiper blades
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-
ing by continuing to turn it all the way.
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following
the steps in reverse order. The wiper
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have appropriate work per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 282.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 282.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
Warning
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When
working on the lighting system, switch off
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a clean cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.
Seite 282
MOBILITY Replacing components
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head-
lights or other light sources. Do not re-
move the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather.
When driving with the lights switched on,
the condensation evaporates after a short
time. The headlight glass does not need to
be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for
instance water droplets in the light, have
the headlights checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected
by changing lights and bulbs. After the
headlight adjustment was changed, have it
checked and, if necessary, corrected by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Front halogen lights, bulb
replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 Low beams/high beams
2 Turn signal
Low beams/high beams
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 282.
55-watt bulb, HB2.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 271.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow,
and remove.
3. Pull off the connector.
Seite 283
Replacing components MOBILITY
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
housing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover
in the reverse order.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 282.
24-watt bulb, PWY24W.
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-
wise, and remove it.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing;
if needed, loosen it with small tilting
movements if possible.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover
in the reverse order.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 284
MOBILITY Replacing components
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Tail lights in split doors
2 Tail lights in bumpers
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Tail lights in split doors
Note the safety information on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 282.
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lights
3 Rear fog light
4 Reversing lights
Turn signals
21-watt bulbs, P21W.
1. Open the split doors.
2. Remove left or right cover. If necessary,
it is then possible to pry the cover off
using a screwdriver or a similar plastic
tool.
3. Press the latches together upward, ar-
row 1, and remove the bulb holder.
Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on
the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-
ing.
Seite 285
Replacing components MOBILITY
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
5. Press the nonworking bulb, arrow 1,
gently into the socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
Rear fog lights/reversing lights
21-watt bulbs, P21W.
1. Open the split doors.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Press the latches together in the direc-
tion of the arrow, arrow 1, and remove
the bulb holder.
Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on
the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-
ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into
the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
– Arrow 2: rear fog lights.
– Arrow 3: reversing light
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
Tail lights in split doors, Union Jack
All lamps in the split doors feature LED
technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Tail lights in bumpers
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 282.
Seite 286
MOBILITY Replacing components
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
In addition, the tail lights in the bumper as-
sume the functions of the brake light, tail
light and turn signals, if the split doors are
open.
Overview
1 Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal
2 Brake lights/turn signals
Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal
21-watt bulbs, P21W.
1. Press out cover below the tail light.
2. Remove the screwdriver from the on-
board vehicle tool kit.
3. Pull the screwdriver blade from the han-
dle and place it on the recessed-head
screw head in the bumper.
4. Attach the screw driver handle with the
slot to the blade, arrow 1.
5. Loosen screw in the bumper, arrow 2.
6. Pull tail light from the bumper.
Seite 287
Replacing components MOBILITY
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
7. Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise
and remove nonworking bulb.
8. To insert the new bulb and install the
tail light, proceed in reverse order of re-
moval. Make sure that the bulb holder
sits tight in the tail light.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 282.
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 282.
Bulbs:
– With white lens: WY5W.
1. Open the hood. The covers of the side
turn signal lights are on the left and
right next to the hinges of the hood.
2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re-
move the cover.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in re-
verse order of removal. Insert the nuts
of the cover and press down.
Seite 288
MOBILITY Replacing components
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be
requested from a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
cle batteries that are compatible with your
vehicle type should be installed in your ve-
hicle. Information on compatible vehicle
batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-
ice center.
Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have a service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been replaced. Once
the battery has been registered again, all
comfort features will be available without
restriction and any Check Control messages
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-
tery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by
a red indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situa-
tions:
– When the inspection glass on the top of
the battery is black.
– When the take-off performance is insuf-
ficient.
The following circumstances can have a
negative effect on the performance of the
battery:
– Frequent short-distance drives.
– The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is
off and via the starting aid terminals, refer
to page 294, in the engine compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
– Memory function: store the positions
again.
– Time: update.
– Date: update.
Seite 289
Replacing components MOBILITY
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-
sition for transport and storage. Secure the
battery so that it does not tip over during
transport.
Fuses
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
fuse with a substitute of another color or
amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compart-
ment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations,
as well as the positions of any other fuse
boxes, is available on the Internet:
www.mini.com/fusecard.
Where applicable, information on the fuse
types and locations is also found on a sepa-
rate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
replace the fuses.
Seite 290
MOBILITY Replacing components
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
Depending on the equipment version, the
warning triangle is located in the cargo area
or under the cargo floor panel.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
MINI Roadside Assistance
Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-
ufacturer.
There are various ways of making contact.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 133.
– Calling with a mobile phone.
Requirements
– Active MINI Connected contract or
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception.
– The ignition is switched on.
Seite 291
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Starting
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance
of the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by re-
questing it through the Service Specialist.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
tance will be informed.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-
quest can be triggered automatically by the
system or manually.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
connection with the MINI Response Center.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-
ble conditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Functional requirements
– The ignition is switched on.
– The Assist system is functional.
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-
gent emergency call: the SIM card
integrated in the vehicle has been acti-
vated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is
automatically initiated immediately after an
Seite 292
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
accident of corresponding severity. Auto-
matic Collision Notification is not affected
by pressing the SOS button.
Manual triggering
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green.
– The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-
cle until the voice connection has been
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
The MINI Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the MINI
Response Center which serve to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures.
For instance, the current position of the
vehicle, if it can be established.
If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
Center may still be able to hear you.
The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started using the battery of another vehi-
cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper
cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
components that are under voltage.
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There
is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-
rect order during connection.
NOTICE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-
ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that no body
contact occurs.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The
voltage information can be found on the
battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting
vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Seite 293
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com-
partment acts as the battery's positive ter-
minal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-
nal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-
tive jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle
providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other
end of the cable to the positive terminal
of the battery, or to the corresponding
starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be
started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-
tive jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
ing engine or body ground of assisting
vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to
the corresponding engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to
be started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not suc-
cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several mi-
nutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Seite 294
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Steptronic transmission with
driven front axle: transporting the
vehicle
General information
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle
transported only with lifted front axle or
on a loading platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short
distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 127.
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a
tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
flat bed.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
Steptronic transmission with ALL4:
transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short
distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 127.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
Seite 295
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 124.
NOTICE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be
moved or towed. There is a risk of damage
to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
Follow the following instructions:
– Make sure that the ignition is switched
on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,
turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-
able.
– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear
axle tilted, as the front wheels could
turn.
– When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
– Larger steering wheel movements are
required.
– The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the ve-
hicle's response.
– Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With driven front axle
Your vehicle should be transported with a
tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
flat bed.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
With ALL4
Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed
surface only
Seite 296
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehi-
cle should only be transported on a loading
platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
dow.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-
hicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
property. Correctly attach the tow bar or
tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following:
– Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces
if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be
carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the vehicle.
Seite 297
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
kit, refer to page 281, are together in the
cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
– Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the
tow fitting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to
the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
to property. Follow the notes on using the
tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-
cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due
to the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 293. If the vehicle is equipped with a
catalytic converter, only tow-start while the
engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system
and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to
page 107.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-
diately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or rope, and switch off the haz-
ard warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 298
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can
damage the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure
washers
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash-
ers, components can be damaged due to
the pressure or temperatures being too
high. There is a risk of damage to property.
Maintain sufficient distance and do not
spray too long continuously. Follow the
operating instructions for the high-pres-
sure washer.
Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes
can cause damage to the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Follow the
following instructions:
– Give preference to cloth vehicle
washes or those that use soft brushes
in order to avoid paint damage.
– Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam-
age to the chassis.
– Observe the tire width of the guide
rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
age to the exterior mirrors.
– With rod antenna: unscrew the rod
antenna to avoid rod antenna break-
age.
– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
the wiper system.
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
manual transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able
to roll freely.
Seite 299
Care MOBILITY
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 124.
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able
to roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 127.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons
in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside when in selector lever po-
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-
tempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Start the engine, refer to page 108.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-
stance from insects, with shampoo and
wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-
tion can be reduced. The heat generated
during braking dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety
and value retention. Environmental influen-
ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-
moved immediately to prevent the finish
from being altered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suita-
ble for vehicles with matte finish.
Seite 300
MOBILITY Care
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-
creased wear and premature degradation of
the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather
care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently
because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
and grease will gradually break down the
protective layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a
vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing
the material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers.
There is a risk of damage to property. En-
sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
agents can destroy the protective layer of
adjacent components, such as the brake
disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
diator grille or door handles with plenty of
water, possibly with shampoo added, partic-
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
con-containing vehicle care products in or-
der to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
with a soft cloth.
Seite 301
Care MOBILITY
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
needed.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
needed.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
Warning
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-
ution for cleaning the safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action
and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
rub back and forth in the direction of travel
only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass detergent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of dis-
plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-
static microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid pressure that is
too high and do not use any scratching
materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
fer to page 147.
Seite 302
MOBILITY Care
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. Further information is available
from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 303
Care MOBILITY
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
REFERENCE
Technical data ......................................................................................... 306
Appendix .................................................................................................. 309
Everything from A to Z ........................................................................ 310
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety-
related functions and systems. When using
these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate
from this, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, country version or coun-
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
values can be found in the approval docu-
ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-spe-
cific measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into ac-
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
deviate, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, tires, load and chassis
version.
MINI Clubman
Width with mirrors in/mm 79.4/2,018
Width without mirrors in/mm 70.9/1,800
Height in/mm 56.7/1,441
Length in/mm 168.5/4,281
Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Seite 306
REFERENCE Technical data
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Weights
MINI Cooper Clubman
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,255/1,930
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,321/1,960
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 939/426
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 952/432
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,172/985
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,194/995
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,194/995
MINI Cooper S Clubman
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,266/1,935
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,343/1,970
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 893/405
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 944/428
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,337/1,060
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,138/970
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,172/985
Seite 307
Technical data REFERENCE
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
MINI Cooper Clubman ALL4
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,431/2,010
Load lbs/kg 871/395
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,304/1,045
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,238/1,015
MINI Cooper S Clubman ALL4
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,519/2,050
Load lbs/kg 922/418
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,370/1,075
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025
MINI John Cooper Works Clubman ALL4
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,564/2,070
Load lbs/kg 917/416
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,414/1,095
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,271/1,030
Capacities
MINI Clubman
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.2/50.0
Observe further information on fuel quality,
refer to page 248.
Seite 308
REFERENCE Technical data
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-
rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Replacing components: Light and bulb
replacement: Front halogen lights, bulb
replacement.
Seite 309
Appendix REFERENCE
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
A/C button, see Air conditioning 207
ABS, Antilock Brake System 178
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-
trol 131
Accessories and parts 10
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 183
Activated-charcoal filter 209
Activation times, parked-car ventila-
tion 210
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based
cruise control 183
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 168
Adaptive chassis 180
Additives, engine oil types 275
Adjustments, steering wheel 101
After washing vehicle 300
Airbags 157
Airbags, indicator and warning light 159
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air
mode 204, 208
Air conditioner 203
Air conditioning 204, 207
Air distribution, manual 205, 209
Air flow, air conditioner 205
Air flow, automatic climate control 208
Air pressure, tires 250
Air vents, see Ventilation 209
Alarm system 85
Alarm triggering 85
Alarm, unintentional 86
ALL4 180
All-season tires, see Winter tires 258
All-wheel drive, see ALL4 180
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 51
Antifreeze, washer fluid 122
Antilock Brake System, ABS 178
Anti-slip control, see DSC 178
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 266
Approach control warning with city light
braking function 169
Approved axle load 307
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Arrival time 144
Ash tray 217
Assistance when driving off 181
AUTO intensity 208
Automatic climate control 206
Automatic Curb Monitor 100
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
ger airbags 159
Automatic headlight control 152
Automatic locking 84
Automatic recirculated-air control 208
Automatic transmission with Step-
tronic 124
Automatic unlocking 84
Automatic vehicle wash 299
AUTO program, automatic climate con-
trol 207
AUTO program, intensity 208
Auto Start/Stop function 110
Auto washing 299
Average consumption 143
Average speed 144
Axle loads, weights 307
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-
port 92, 93
Backrest, seats 91
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 291
Battery, disposing of 290
Battery, vehicle 289
Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
ing 294
Belts, safety belts 94
Seite 310
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Beverage holder, cup holder 222
Blocking, power window 88
Bluetooth connection 58
Bonus range, GREEN Mode 239
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 222
Brake assistant 178
Brake discs, break-in 232
Brake pads, break-in 232
Braking, information 234
Breakdown assistance 291
Break-in 232
Break recommendation, see Fatigue
alert 176
Brightness of Control Display 55
Bulb replacement 282
Bulb replacement, front 283, 284
Bulb replacement, rear 285
Bulb replacement, side 288
Bulbs and lights 282
Button, SOS 292
Button, Start/Stop 107
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 293
C
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 11
Calling up mirror adjustment 84
Calling up seat adjustment 84
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-
ligent Safety 168
Camera-based cruise control 183
Camera lenses, care 302
Camera, rearview camera 196
Can holder, see Cup holder 222
Care, displays 302
Care, vehicle 300
Care, washing the vehicle 299
Cargo area 224
Cargo area, adapting size 229
Cargo area door, see Split doors 80
Cargo area, enlarging 227
Cargo area, loading 225
Cargo area, storage compartments 226
Cargo cover 226
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 227
Cargo, stowing and securing 225
Cargo straps 225
Carpet, care 302
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas
system 233
CBS Condition Based Service 279
Center armrest 221
Center console 40
Central Information Display (CID) 42
Central instrument cluster, LED ring 146
Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
side 75
Central screen, see Control Display 44
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Changing parts 281
Changing wheels 264
Changing wheels/tires 257
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
number 15
Check Control 133
Checking the oil level electronically 273
Children, seating position 102
Children, transporting safely 102
Child restraint system 102
Child restraint system LATCH 104
Child restraint systems, mounting 103
Child safety locks 106
Child seat, mounting 103
Child seats 102
Chrome parts, care 301
Cigarette lighter 217
Cleaning, displays 302
Climate control 203, 206
Clothes hooks 222
Coasting 240
Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-
ing 240
Coasting with idling engine 240
Combination switch, see Turn signals 114
Combi switch, see Wiper system 115, 119
Comfort Access 76
Compartments in the doors 221
Compass 215
Seite 311
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
ces 58
Compressor 260
Computer, see Onboard Computer 142
Condensation on windows 209
Condensation under the vehicle 235
Condition Based Service CBS 279
Configuring driving program 181
Confirmation signal 84
Connecting device 57
Connecting mobile phone 57
Connecting smartphone 57
Connecting telephone 57
Connections 57
Consumption, see Average consump-
tion 143
Consumption, see Current consump-
tion 139
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Continued driving with a flat tire 164, 167
Control Display 44
Control Display, settings 53
Controller 44
Control systems, driving stability 178
Convenient closing 72
Convenient opening 71
Coolant 277
Cooling, maximum 207
Cooling system 277
Cornering light 153
Corrosion on brake discs 235
Cosmetic mirror 217
Coupling, see Pairing 57
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72
Cruise control 190
Cruise control, active 183
Cruise control with distance control, see
Camera-based cruise control 183
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 190
Cruising range 138
Cup holder 222
Current consumption 139
D
Damage, tires 257
Data memory 12
Data protection, settings 56
Data, technical 306
Date 54
Date display 138
Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-
tion 173
Daytime running lights 153
DCC, see Cruise control 190
Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-
dows 205
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 209
Defrosting the windows 205
Deleting personal data 56
Deletion of personal data 56
Destination distance 144
Device list 57
Digital clock 138
Digital compass 215
Dimensions 306
Dimmable exterior mirrors 100
Dimmable interior mirror 101
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 114
Display and input 42
Display, electronic, instrument cluster 133
Display, engine temperature 144
Display, GREEN Mode 237
Display lighting, see Instrument light-
ing 155
Displays 132
Displays, care 302
Disposal, coolant 278
Disposal, vehicle battery 290
Distance control, see PDC 192
Distance to destination 144
Divided screen view, split screen 43
Drive-off assistant 181
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 178
Driver assistance, see Intelligent
Safety 168
Driver profiles 81
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 82
Driver profiles, importing profiles 83
Seite 312
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-
ing Modes switch 180
Driving Excitement, SPORT 145
Driving instructions 0
Driving instructions, break-in 232
Driving mode, GREEN 237
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy-
sis 241
Driving modes 180
Driving notes, general 233
Driving on racetracks 235
Driving stability control systems 178
Driving style analysis 241
Driving tip, GREEN tip 239
Driving tips 233
Drying air, see Air conditioning 204, 207
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 178
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 179
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-
sis 180
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 178
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 179
E
Easy Opener 78
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 133
Electronic oil measurement 273
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see
DSC 178
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 247
Emergency Request 292
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis-
tance 291
Emergency unlocking, transmission
lock 130
Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see
Emergency wheel 269
Energy control 139
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 110
Engine, automatic switch-off 110
Engine compartment 270
Engine compartment, working in 271
Engine coolant 277
Engine idling when driving, coasting 240
Engine oil 273
Engine oil, adding 274
Engine oil change 276
Engine oil filler neck 274
Engine oil types to add 275
Engine start, jump-starting 293
Engine start, see Starting the engine 108
Engine stop 109
Engine temperature, display 144
Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 8
Entering a vehicle wash 299
Equipment, interior 212
Error displays, see Check Control 133
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
DSC 178
Exchanging wheels/tires 257
Exhaust gas system 233
Exiting a vehicle wash 299
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 100
Exterior mirrors 99
Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni-
tor 100
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 100
External start 293
External temperature display 138
External temperature warning 138
Eyes for securing cargo 225
F
Failure message, see Check Control 133
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 86
Fan, see Air flow 205, 208
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 94
Fatigue alert 176
Filler neck for engine oil 274
Filter, see Microfilter 205
Seite 313
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-
ter 209
Finding charging stations, see Charging sta-
tions and points of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Fine wood, care 301
First-aid kit 291
Fish, MINIMALISM display 241
Flat tire, changing wheels 264
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 166
Flat tire, repairing 259
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 161
Flat tire, warning light 162, 166
Flooding 233
Floor carpet, care 302
Floor mats, care 302
Fogged up windows 205
Fold-away position, windshield wip-
ers 118, 121
Fold back rear seat backrests 227
Foot brake 234
For Your Own Safety 10
Front airbags 157
Front fog lights 154
Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-
ment 284
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-
activation 159
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator
light 160
Front seats 91
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 166
Fuel 248
Fuel cap 246
Fuel filler flap 246
Fuel gauge 137
Fuel quality 248
Fuel recommendation 248
Fuel, tank capacity 308
Fuse 290
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
sal Remote Control 212
Gasoline 248
Gear shift indicator 140
General driving notes 233
General settings 53
Glare shield 217
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 90
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
roof 89
Glove compartment 220
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 54
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
GREEN bonus range 239
GREEN Mode 237
GREEN - program, driving dynamics 180
GREEN tip, driving tip 239
Gross vehicle weight, approved 307
Ground clearance 235
H
Halogen headlights 283
Handbrake, see Parking brake 113
Hand-held transmitter, alternating
code 213
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Hazard warning flashers 291
Head airbag 158
Headlight control, automatic 152
Headlight courtesy delay feature 152
Headlight flasher 115
Headlight glass 283
Headlights, care 300
Head restraints, front 96
Head restraints, rear 97
Head-up Display 147
Head-up Display, see Memory function 98
Head-up Display, shift point indicator 150
Head-up Display, sport displays 149
Head-up Display, standard view 148
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 225
High-beam Assistant 153
High beams 115
Seite 314
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-
sistant 153
Hills 234
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-
tant 181
Holder for beverages 222
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 212
Homepage 8
Hood 271
Horn 38
Hot exhaust gas system 233
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
HUD Head-up Display 147
Hydroplaning 233
I
Ice warning, see External temperature
warning 138
Icy roads, see External temperature warn-
ing 138
Identification marks, tires 254
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-
cation number 15
Ignition off 107
Ignition on 107
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-
ter 146
Indication of a flat tire 162, 166
Indicator light, see Check Control 133
Individual air distribution 205, 209
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 81
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Inflation pressure, tires 250
Inflation pressure warning, tires 166
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 142
Information 8
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 162
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 166
Input and display 42
Instrument cluster 132
Instrument cluster, electronic displays 133
Instrument lighting 155
Integrated key 74
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle 65
Integrated Universal Remote Control 212
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 112
Intelligent emergency call 292
Intelligent Safety 168
Intended use 10
Intensity, AUTO program 208
Interior equipment 212
Interior lights 155
Interior lights during unlocking 71
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72
Interior mirror 99
Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 101
Interior mirror, compass 215
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 100
Interior motion sensor 86
Internet site 8
Interval display, service requirements 139
Interval mode 116, 120
In the vicinity of the center console 40
In the vicinity of the roofliner 41
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 38
IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle 65
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 267
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 90
Jam protection system, windows 87
Jump-starting 293
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 76
Key, see Integrated key 74
Key, see Vehicle key 70
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 127
Knee airbag 158
Seite 315
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
L
Label on recommended tires 258
Label, runflat tires 259
Language, on the Control Display 53
Lashing eyes 225
LATCH child restraint fixing system 104
Launch Control 131
Leather, care 301
LED ring, central instrument cluster 146
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 282
Letters and numbers, entering 46
Light 151
Light-alloy wheels, care 301
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 282
Lighter 217
Lighting 151
Light replacement 282
Light replacement, front 283, 284
Light replacement, rear 285
Light replacement, side 288
Lights and bulbs 282
Light switch 151
List of all messages 55
Load 225
Loading 224
Loading position 227
Location, vehicle position 54
Locking, automatic 84
Locking, from inside 75
Locking, see Opening and Closing 70
Locking, settings 83
Low beams 151
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-
sistant 153
Lower back support 93
Lower back support, mechanical 92
Lug bolt lock 266
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
rack 235
Lumbar support 93
Lumbar support, mechanical 92
M
Maintenance 279
Maintenance requirements 279
Maintenance, service requirements 139
Maintenance system, MINI 279
Make-up mirror 217
Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
trol 133
Manual air distribution 205, 209
Manual air flow 205, 208
Manual brake, see Parking brake 113
Manual mode, transmission 128
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 247
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 193
Manual operation, rearview camera 196
Manual transmission 123
Manufacturer of the MINI 10
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Matte finish 300
Maximum cooling 207
Maximum speed, display 140
Maximum speed, winter tires 258
Measurement, units of 54
Mechanical key 74
Media of the Owner's Manual 65
Medical kit 291
Memory function 98
Menu in instrument cluster 142
Menus, Central Information Display
(CID) 45
Messages 55
Messages, see Check Control 133
Microfilter 205, 209
MID - program, driving dynamics 180
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
MINI driving modes 180
MINI logo projection during unlocking 71
MINI maintenance system 279
MINIMALISM analyzer 241
MINIMALISM information 240
Minimum tread, tires 256
Seite 316
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Mirrors 99
Mirror, see Memory function 98
Mobile communication devices in the vehi-
cle 233
Mobility System 260
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Moisture in headlight 283
Monitor, see Control Display 44
Mounting of child restraint systems 103
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 8
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head re-
straints 96
Neck restraints, rear, see Head re-
straints 97
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 301
New wheels and tires 257
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
No-touch opening the split doors 78
O
OBD Onboard Diagnostics 280
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 197
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 249
Odometer 137
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Oil 273
Oil, adding 274
Oil change 276
Oil change interval, service require-
ments 139
Oil filler neck 274
Oil types to add, engine 275
Onboard Computer 142
Onboard Diagnostics OBD 280
Onboard literature, printed 65
Onboard vehicle tool kit 281
On-call service, see Breakdown assis-
tance 291
Opening and Closing 70
Opening, from inside 75
Operating concept Central Information Dis-
play (CID) operating concept 42
Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 42
Operation via the Controller 45
Operation via touchscreen 47
Optional equipment 9
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air
control 208
Owner's Manual, printed 65
P
Paint, vehicle 300
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 86
Panic mode 86
Panoramic glass sunroof 89
Parallel parking assistant 198
Park Distance Control PDC 192
Parked-car ventilation 210
Parked vehicle, condensation 235
Parking aid, see PDC 192
Parking assistant 198
Parking brake 113
Parking lights 151
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting 100
Pathway lines, rearview camera 197
PDC Park Distance Control 192
Performance Control 180
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 81
Plastic, care 302
PostCrash — iBrake 176
Seite 317
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Power failure 289
Power windows 87
Pressure, tires 250
Pressure warning, tires 166
Printed onboard literature 65
Profiles, see Driver profiles 81
Programmable memory buttons, Central In-
formation Display (CID) 48
Protective function, glass sunroof 90
Protective function, windows 87
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 44
R
Racetrack operation 235
Radiator fluid 277
Radio-ready state 108
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 116, 120
Ratchet straps 225
Rear lights 285
Rearview camera 195
Rear window defroster 205, 209
Rear window wiper, operation 117, 121
Recirculated-air filter 209
Recirculated-air mode 204, 208
Recommended fuel grade 249
Recommended tire brands 258
Refueling 246
Remaining range 138
Remote control, universal 212
Replacing parts 281
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 73
Replacing wheels/tires 257
Reporting safety malfunctions 15
RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise
control 183
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 190
Reserve warning, see Range 138
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 162
Retreaded tires 258
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis-
tance 291
Roadside parking lights 152
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 213
RON recommended fuel grade 249
Roofliner 41
Roof-mounted luggage rack 235
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat
tires 259
Rubber components, care 301
Runflat tires 259
S
Safe braking 234
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and
front passenger seat 96
Safety belts 94
Safety belts, care 302
Safety locks, doors, and windows 106
Safety switch, windows 88
Safety systems, airbags 157
Saving fuel 236
Screen, see Control Display 44
Screwdriver 281
Sealant, see Mobility System 260
Seat heating, front 94
Seating position for children 102
Seat, see Memory function 98
Seats, front 91
Securing cargo 225
Selection list in instrument cluster 142
Sensors, care 302
Service and warranty 11
Service requirements, Condition Based
Service CBS 279
Service requirements, display 139
Servotronic 182
SET button, see Camera-based cruise con-
trol 183
SET button, see Cruise control 190
Settings, locking/unlocking 83
Settings, mirrors 99
Settings on the Control Display 53
Shift gate rotary switch 180
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 129
Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 150
Seite 318
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Side airbag 157
Signaling, horn 38
Signals when unlocking 84
Sitting safely 91
Size 306
Slide/tilt glass roof 89
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
SMS text messages, supplementary 137
Snow chains 264
Socket 217
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 280
Software update 63
SOS button 292
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 269
Speed, average 144
Speed Limit Info 140
Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 144
Speed limits, display 140
Speed warning 146
Split doors 80
Split doors, opening with no-touch activa-
tion 78
Split doors via remote control 72
Split screen 43
Sport displays 145
Sport displays, Head-up Display 149
SPORT program, driving dynamics 181
Sport program, transmission 128
Stability control systems 178
Standard equipment 9
Standard view, Head-up Display 148
Stars, MINIMALISM display 241
Start/stop, automatic function 110
Start/Stop button 107
Starting the engine 108
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Status control display, tires 161
Status information, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 43
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 150
Steering assistance 182
Steering wheel, adjusting 101
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-
tronic transmission 124
Steptronic Sport transmission with double
clutch, see Steptronic transmission 124
Steptronic transmission 124
Steptronic transmission with double clutch,
see Steptronic transmission 124
Stopping the engine 109
Storage compartments 220
Storage, tires 259
Storing the vehicle 303
Stowing and securing cargo 225
Suitable devices 58
Suitable mobile phones 58
Summer tires, tread 256
Sun visor 217
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 65
Supplementary SMS text messages 137
Switch for driving dynamics 180
Switch, see Cockpit 38
Symbols 9
T
Tachometer 137
Tailgate, see Split doors 80
Tail lights 285
Technical changes, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Technical data 306
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Temperature, air conditioner 204
Temperature, automatic climate con-
trol 206
Temperature display for external tempera-
ture 138
Temperature, engine 144
Terminal, starting aid 294
Seite 319
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 85
Thigh support 94
Through-loading system 227
Tilt alarm sensor 86
Tilting, passenger's side mirror 100
Time 53
Time of arrival 144
Tire damage 257
Tire identification marks 254
Tire inflation pressure 250
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see
FTM 166
Tire pressure 250
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 161
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 260
Tires, changing 257
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 260
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 250
Tires, runflat 259
Tire tread 256
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Tools 281
Total vehicle weight 307
Touchscreen 47
Towing 294
Tow-starting 294
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 161
Traction control 179
TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam-
ics 179
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Transmission lock, electronic unlock-
ing 130
Transmission lock, releasing manually 130
Transmission, manual transmission 123
Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-
sion 124
Transporting children safely 102
Tread, tires 256
Trip computer 144
Triple turn signal activation 115
Trip odometer 137
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 137
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 197
Turn signal, front 283, 284
Turn signal, indicator light 136
Turn signal, side 288
Turn signals, operation 114
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 285
U
Unintentional alarm 86
Units of measurement 54
Universal remote control 212
Unlocking, automatic 84
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 70
Unlocking, settings 83
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upholstery care 301
USB connection 60
USB interface, position in vehicle 218
USB port, see USB interface 218
Used battery, disposing of 290
Use, intended 10
Using a smartphone via voice activation 51
V
Vanity mirror 217
Vehicle battery 289
Vehicle, break-in 232
Vehicle care 300
Vehicle care products 300
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 15
Vehicle jack 267
Vehicle key, additional 73
Vehicle key, loss 73
Vehicle key, malfunction 73
Vehicle key, opening/closing 70
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 73
Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 70
Vehicle paint 300
Vehicle position, vehicle location 54
Vehicle status 150
Vehicle storage 303
Vehicle wash 299
Seite 320
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
Vehicle wash, automatic 299
Vehicle, washing 299
Ventilation 209
Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 210
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15
Voice activation system 49
Voice command response, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Control 133
Warning displays, see Check Control 133
Warning messages, see Check Control 133
Warning triangle 291
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 122
Washer nozzles, windshield 117, 121
Washing the vehicle 299
Water on roads 233
Weights 307
Welcome lights 152
Welcome lights during unlocking 71
Wheel cleaner 301
Wheels, changing 257
Wheels, everything on wheels and
tires 250
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 166
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 161
Windows, powered 87
Windshield cleaning system 115, 119
Windshield defroster 205, 209
Windshield washer fluid 122
Windshield washer nozzles 117, 121
Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
tion 118, 121
Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-
tem 115, 119
Winter storage, care 303
Winter tires, suitable tires 258
Winter tires, tread 256
Wiper blades, replacing 281
Wiper fluid 122
Wiper system 115, 119
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Wood, care 301
Word match concept, navigation 42
Wrench 281
Seite 321
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
01402667055 ue
*BL2667055003*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01402667055 ue
*BL2667055003*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402667055 - VI/19
